WICE Wiki v2.95 - User contributions [en]

https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/api.php?action=feedcontributions&feedformat=atom&user=Carl.ridderstolpe WICE Wiki v2.95 - User contributions [en] 2026-04-05T18:08:32Z User contributions MediaWiki 1.44.0 https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.90&diff=3687 New features in v2.90 2024-09-16T08:12:20Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: /* Support to update the WMU software remotely */</p> <hr /> <div>==Support for WireGuard VPN on the WCU==<br /> There is now support to configure a [https://www.wireguard.com/ WireGuard] VPN network for the WCU. In the tab "Connection" in the WCU configuration the section "VPN" is visible. The settings are enabled/disabled and a field where the VPN group name is entered. The group name is used to know which group of peers the WCU can communicate with.<br /> <br /> ==Support vehicle announcement for XCP in Signal Reader==<br /> In signal reader modules with interface XCP_TCP or XCP_UDP IP and port can be set to static, from A2L file or Vehicle announcement (new). Read more about signal reader [[Signal Reader Assignment Editor|here.]]<br /> <br /> ==Support for Vehicle Communications Forwarder (VCF) settings for resource groups==<br /> Support for VCF has been extended to be configurable on a resource group level. Read more about VCF [[Vehicle Communication Forwarder|here]].<br /> <br /> ==Support for vehicle settings templating==<br /> There is now support for vehicle templates when editing or creating a vehicle. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice290/index.php/Vehicle_templates here].<br /> <br /> == Improved assignment review process ==<br /> We have enhanced the review process in the portal, allowing users to now utilize it directly within the assignment itself. Read more about it [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice290/index.php/Review_assignment_process here].<br /> <br /> == Support to update the WMU software remotely ==<br /> [[File:WMU configuration.png|thumb|522x522px|WMU configuration]]<br /> There is now support for configuring WMUs to set preferred software version. If a preferred software version has been set, once the WMU reports back its corresponding software version it is displayed in the WMU software configuration. The WMU software configuration can be found in the WMU tab of the WCU configuration. Read more about WMUs [[WMU|here]].<br /> <br /> == Support to enable or disable the WCU to use ethernet activation ==<br /> Under the edit configurations windows in the vehicles tab you can find a new checkbox in the IO tab. This checkbox enables or disables the WCU to use ethernet activation.</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=I/O_configurations&diff=3686 I/O configurations 2024-09-16T08:00:04Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: /* The Miscellaneous Section */</p> <hr /> <div><div class="keywords"> io, io configurations, io config, io configs </div><br /> <includeonly>= I/O configurations =</includeonly><br /> <noinclude>The following applies to version >= 2.41 of the portal:</noinclude>For WCUs with software version >= 2.41 the "Edit Configuration" window has a new tab named "IO". In this tab, it is possible to edit the settings of the CAN and Ethernet channels of a WCU. It is also possible to apply a pre defined template which is created and managed by an admin. The "Edit Configuration" window is reached by going to the Vehicles tab, select a WCU and press the button "Edit Configuration".<br /> [[File:Edit configuration IO.png|thumb|Edit Configuration: IO.]]<br /> <br /> ==Edit CAN channels==<br /> [[File:WCU conf io can channels.png|thumb|Edit CAN Channels]]<br /> The number of available CAN channels depends on the platform type of the WCU which is configured. The group of CAN channels consists of four columns named Channel, Speed, Name and Comment. Each column is described separately below.<br /> <br /> ===Channel===<br /> This column is a checkbox and if you enable CAN X, this means that X is available for mappings when creating a new task and uploading this task to his WCU. Read more about [[Mappings]]. In the same way, disabling CAN X means that X is not available for mappings. If a CAN channel for some reason is not connected to the WCU, then it could be good choice to disabling it here.<br /> <br /> ===Speed (kB)===<br /> The speed column shows the baud rate of each CAN channel. This value was previously added to the WCU configuration when the WCU was connected to a CAR but from now it has to be set manually in this tab.<br /> <br /> ===Name===<br /> In this column it is possible to set a nickname for the channel. This name is used when a Signalreader task or assignment is automapped (see [[Mappings]]) so choose your names carefully. The default value is CAN 1,2..6.<br /> <br /> ===Comment===<br /> The last column is used to add some comments to each channel. This is typically some describing text, e.g. the reason why a channel is disabled.<br /> <br /> ===Add WMU(s)===<br /> If your Portal has [[WMU | WMU's]] enabled the "Add WMU" button will show in the CAN section. You can then add/remove WMU's and configure their CAN channels in the same way as the WCU's CAN channels are configured. For each WMU that is added, a corresponding tab is added under the [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#WMU's_Power_Management | Power Management tab]] for configuring the WMU's power behaviour.<br /> <br /> === Add CAN channels ===<br /> If your Portal has Vehicle Communication Forwarder enabled, the "Add CAN channels" button will show in the CAN section. If both WMUs and Vehicle Communication Forwarder are enabled in your Portal, only "Add CAN channels" will show up. After having added a Vehicle Communication Forwarder with at least one CAN channel, pressing the button again will add more CAN channels to the Vehicle Communication Forwarder. When removing CAN channels, it is possible to either remove the entire Vehicle Communication Forwarder, or individual CAN channels from it.<br /> <br /> ==Edit Ethernet Channels==<br /> [[File:NewEthernetChannel.png|thumb|Edit Ethernet Channels]]<br /> Like for CAN channels, the number of available Ethernet channels depends on the platform type of the WCU which is configured. The group of Ethernet channels contains eight columns and the individual meaning is as follows.<br /> <br /> ===Channel===<br /> This column indicates which interface or interfaces that exists.<br /> <br /> ===Addressing mode===<br /> In this column the Addressing mode is configured. The choices are "DHCP client", "AutoIP" and "Static".<br /> <br /> ===IP address===<br /> Here you set the static IP address if you have selected "Static" as the Addressing mode.<br /> <br /> ===Netmask===<br /> Here you set the netmask if you have selected "Static" as the Addressing mode.<br /> <br /> ===Default route===<br /> Here you set the default route if you have selected "Static" as the Addressing mode. This field only shows if the WCU software version is 2.85.0 or later. The default route is the route that takes effect when no other route is available for an IP destination address.<br /> <br /> ===Name Server (DNS)===<br /> Here you set the Name Server if you have selected "Static" as the Addressing mode. This field only shows if the WCU software version is 2.85.0 or later. Here you set the name of the DNS protocol.<br /> <br /> ===Name===<br /> In this column you can set a nickname for this channel. This setting has no effect on the WCU side.<br /> <br /> ===Comment===<br /> In the last column you can set a comment for this channel. Like for the name, this setting has no effect on the WCU side.<br /> <br /> ==The Miscellaneous Section==<br /> [[File:Screenshot from 2024-09-16 09-49-47.png|thumb|Miscellaneous]]<br /> This section is available for WCUs with version 2.49 or later.<br /> ===Set digital out 3 on boot=== <br /> Digital out 3 is one of the output pins in the dsub contact on WCUs of model MX4. This setting activates that pin on start-up of the WCU. The purpose of this is to trigger an external measurement equipment (e.g. [[Creating_a_Task#M-Log|M-Log]] or [[Creating_a_Task#Arcos|Arcos]]).<br /> <br /> ===Diagnostic tester priority===<br /> For WCUs of version later than or equal to 2.60 it is possible to choose to configure the diagnostic tester priority. If enabled, a value between 1-12 can be selected. The described options are depicted in Figure "Miscellaneous".<br /> <br /> === Allow ethernet activation on WCU ===<br /> For WCUs of version 2.90 or later it is possible to choose whether or not to allow the WCU to use ethernet activation. Not enabling this might disturb some of the WCUs features.<br /> <br /> ===Set 5V out on boot===<br /> Option to set one of the output pins on the WCU to supply electricity at 5V to external equipment when the WCU is starting up. The option is visible for WCUs of model MX4 (except submodel V61) and with version 2.76.0 or later.<br /> <br /> ===Activate buzzer on detected digital input change===<br /> Option to enable that the WCU makes a buzzing sound when a trigger-button (or other digital input) is activated on the WCU. It is possible on all MX4 models. The option is visible for WCUs with version 2.76.0 or later.<br /> <br /> ==Manage templates==<br /> [[File:Io config2.png|thumb|frame|Selecting Template]]<br /> Admins can save configs as templates (see [[#Manage templates (for admins) | Manage templates (for admins)]]) and normal users can use these templates to fill all columns with the data stored in the template.<br /> Clicking "Apply" will apply the selected template. You can always change settings or add more info, the template could be anything you need or just act as a starting point.<br /> <br /> If WMUs are enabled in the portal, a template will save the CANs from each WMU and when a template is selected the WMU CANs are applied 1:1 to each existing WMU in the configuration. <br /> If there are no WMUs in the configuration the template's WMU CANs will not be applied, only the WCU's CANs.<br /> <br /> ==Manage templates (for admins)==<br /> [[File:Io config3.png|thumb|frame|Manage Templates (admin view)]]<br /> [[File:Io config4.png|thumb|frame|Manage Templates (with WMUs enabled)]]<br /> If you are an admin you have an extra button "Save current config as template" in the Manage configuration templates window. Clicking it to save the current configuration as a template will prompt you for a name. If the name already exists (case insensitive) a confirmation dialog will popup before overwriting.<br /> <br /> Additionally, as admin you will be able to remove existing templates, which is done by clicking the red "Remove record" icon to the right of the template name. A confirmation dialog will popup to prevent deletion by mistake.<br /> <br /> ==Show Vehicle Profile==<br /> [[File:WCU conf io car interf.png|thumb|Vehicle Profile]]<br /> The button "Show vehicle profile" can be used to show, and hide, a panel showing the CAN and ethernet information for the connected car, see Figure "Vehicle Profile". This option is disabled if no car is connected.</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Screenshot_from_2024-09-16_09-49-47.png&diff=3685 File:Screenshot from 2024-09-16 09-49-47.png 2024-09-16T07:58:14Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>a picture of the miscellaneous section in the under the io tab in the edit configurations window of the vechicles tab.</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.84&diff=3410 New features in v2.84 2023-07-04T09:12:38Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: Added some references to further reading.</p> <hr /> <div>== Context menu added for some plot options in the signal preview ==<br /> A context menu has been added in the signal preview when right clicking the plot. The menu gives you the opportunity to toggle the visibility of the chart title, the y-axes titles and the y-axes themselves. It also gives you the option to toggle between having the file name or signal names as the plot title. Read more [[Preview data#Right click context menu|here]].<br /> == Improved tooltip when hovering over plots ==<br /> The tooltip that appears when you hover over the plot in the signal preview now showcase the value of all signals and just not the one closest to the cursor.<br /> == Functionality added to add more files to plot without loosing signal selection ==<br /> When viewing signals in the signal preview you can now add more files without loosing the settings or the selections of your current plot. This is done by pressing the new "Add more files" button which takes you back where you can add new files in and also remove old files. Read more [[Preview data#Adding/removing source files without loosing setting and selections|here]].<br /> == Show/hide module button of signal preview improved ==<br /> The show/hide module button in the signal preview now applies the module names to the signal list and the signal preview instead of only effecting the signal list.<br /> == Allow more signals in signal preview ==<br /> The maximum number of signals in a plot is now infinitely many signals in a single plot.<br /> == WCU information panel extended with certificate expiry date ==<br /> The WCU information panel now also shows the certificates expiry date. Hovering over the date will also show how many days left before the certificate expires. Read more [https://wiki.alkit.se/wice284/index.php/Information_Panel here]<br /> <br /> == Support to have per-vehicle ECU PIN codes ==<br /> For SWDL tasks there is now support to have ECU PIN codes per vehicle instead of just global ones for a task. See further in [[The Portal Administrator View#Upload a file describing ECU pin codes for a vehicle|ECU PIN codes for vehicles]] on how to prepare a vehicle with individual pin codes and on creating SWDL tasks [[Creating a Task#SWDL|here]].<br /> <br /> == New Canrecorder ==<br /> A new Canrecorder is introduced in 2.84 with design changes and some new settings like: trigger option and shot count. Read more [[Creating a Task#CAN-recorder|here.]]<br /> <br /> == New WICE-internal signals in Signal Reader ==<br /> Two new WICE-internal signals are introduced in introduced in 2.84: WICE.WCU_Storage, giving the available storage on the WCU in percent, and WICE.Connectivity, giving the current connectivity mode. Read more [[WICE_Internal_Signals|here.]]</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Preview_data&diff=3405 Preview data 2023-07-03T09:29:32Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: Rewrote the signal preview page to be more structured and reflect the layout in 2.84</p> <hr /> <div>This is a tool used to graph signal values from MDF-files, preview Video and visualize GPS-data.<br /> <br /> == Quick usage guide ==<br /> Here is a step by step guide walking you through a simple use case to get you started. For more detailed info on the different settings or function read the article below.<br /> <br /> #Select a "Source" (file or measurement) from the source list on the left hand side of the screen.<br /> #A list of signals will show up in the signal list on the right hand side of the screen. Select one or more.<br /> #Each selected signal will show up as a thumbnail at the bottom of the screen.<br /> #In order to inspect a signal more closely, double click or "drag and drop" the signal into the Master signal preview to plot it.<br /> #If there is any GPS data available, then that data will be visualized in the map.<br /> # If there is any video or audio data available, then a media controller is visible below the main plot. '''See [[Preview data#Integrated video and audio preview|Preview data#Integrated video and audio]]'''<br /> <br /> == Source List ==<br /> The source list is a list of all source files that have been added to the signal preview. Here you chose which file you want to view signals from by clicking on it and when switching between sources they will try to keep selections as similar as possible. This means that if 2 sources share signals and you select and plot a shared signal in one source and then switch to the other the signal will stay selected and plotted. <br /> <br /> At the bottom of the source list you can switch between showing the sources as their filenames or as their measurement dates. <br /> <br /> === Adding/removing source files without loosing setting and selections ===<br /> At the bottom left of the screen you can press the button "Add more files" to add new files and remove current files without removing your settings or which signals are selected. By pressing this button the tasks panel will re-open but with a second list of files at the bottom which shows the selected files in the preview. <br /> <br /> To add new files you search for the file you want to add and drag it from the top box to the bottom box where it will now appear. <br /> <br /> To remove a file you drag it from the bottom box to the top box which makes the file disappear in the bottom box.<br /> <br /> When you are done adding and removing files you press the button "Add Files to preview" at the right side of the screen to get back to the preview with the files from the bottom box.<br /> <br /> ==Signal List ==<br /> [[File:Signal list.png|thumb|From left to right is the button to show/hide modules, apply signal selections and save signal selections]]<br /> From the signal list you select which signals you want to view from the selected source. To help you find which signals you want to view there is a search bar at the top of the list. You can also at the bottom of the list select to see signals from a specific module.<br /> <br /> === Save signal selection===<br /> If you want to save a set of selected signals for suture use you start by selecting the signals you want to save and then pressing the "Save selection" button on the bottom of the signal list. This will open a small window where you first need to enter a name and then press "Save collection" to save your selected signals.<br /> <br /> ===Apply saved signal selection ===<br /> To apply a saved set of selected signals you will press the "Apply signals" button which opens a small window. Here you will see all saved sets and you can apply one by selecting the one you want to apply and click "Apply collection". Note that this will only select and not deselect signals so if you only want to have the signals in the set selected you first need to make sure that no signals are selected (which can be done with the "Unselect all signals" button).<br /> <br /> ===Show/Hide module prefix===<br /> If you want to have the module name as a prefix to the signal name you can enable that by pressing the "Show modules button" and you can also disable it by pressing the "Hide modules" button. Note that this also affects the signal names in the dashboards signal preview.<br /> <br /> == Dashboard==<br /> In the Dashboard you find multiple tabs with different functions and purposes which you can read about below.<br /> <br /> ===Signal preview===<br /> The Signal preview tab shows you a small preview of all selected signals in the signal list tab. By double clicking on or dragging a preview into the master preview you will plot the signal. Here you can also deselect (and in that way stop a signal from being plotted by pressing the "x" on the preview. <br /> <br /> ===File information===<br /> Here you will find information about the selected source file.<br /> <br /> ===Data export===<br /> Here you can export the data from the plotted signals as a text file. To do this select the signals you want to plot in the left most box, specify what interval you want data from, set a download description and then press "To text file". <br /> <br /> ===Statistics===<br /> Here you find statistics like amount of data points, mean and global max about the plotted signals.<br /> <br /> ===Plot Options===<br /> Here you can set how the Y-axes of the signals should behave. By default its set to "Fit to curve" meaning all signals will be fitted to the curve making the signals max value the highest point and the signals min value as the signals lowest point. The other option "Signal default" makes the vertical axis be scaled based on a signals predetermined minimum and maximum values which are embedded into the MDF file. Which makes it easier to compare the same signal from different measurements and possible shows the signal in a more appropriate scale.<br /> <br /> ===Audio Playback ===<br /> When plotting a signal with accompanying video and audio you can use this panel to control the audio being played.<br /> <br /> ==Master Preview==<br /> <br /> ===Preview Modes===<br /> [[File:Plot button.png|left|frameless]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> "Master signal preview" has four different preview modes which you can select from the bottom left corner of the "Master signal preview" window:<br /> # View only one plot<br /> #View a plot, and video side by side<br /> #View a plot and GPS data visualization side by side (this is the default view)<br /> <br /> ====Integrated video and audio preview====<br /> [[File:Video-in-preview.png|thumb|400x400px| Preview Data Window - Video]]If video mode is selected then the preview tool will automatically detect if there is any video correlated to the currently selected file. If such video exists, a media controller chart will be visible below the main play. See screenshot "Preview Data Window - Video".<br /> <br /> There are several ways of controlling the playback for the found media measurements. By default the playback starts from time = 0 when the user clicks the play icon in toolstrip below the media chart. If there is any media file at the current position (as in the example) the playback of the measurements is automatically started. One can also choose to start from a certain position by either clicking between the audio and video bars in the chart or by ctrl+left mouse click on the plot in the main chart.<br /> <br /> When the playback is started, the red marker is moving in the two grids and the play button is replaced by the pause button. Simply click the pause button to pause the playback.<br /> <br /> To stop and revert the playback to the start position, click the stop button. The left and right buttons to the right of the stop buttons are used to jump to the nearest media measurement on the timeline.<br /> <br /> If both audio and video measurements exists (like in the example) one can choose to only play the video measurement by clicking the video measurement bar in the graph. This also applies to when there are multiple overlapping videos.<br /> <br /> If there are multiple overlapping videos, on of the videos can be viewed in "picture in picture-mode". To enable this, click the three dots in the bottom right corner of the video and select "Picture in picture" in the sub menu appearing.<br /> <br /> This can of course also be used for a single video as well.[[File:Map-in-preview.png|thumb|Preview Data Window - GPS<br /> ]]<br /> <br /> ====Integrated GPS data visualization ====<br /> By default the map will be set to display a plot, along side of a map. Once a signal is selected and pushed up into the mater signal preview any available GPS data will be visualized in the map, see Figure "Preview Data Window - GPS". If you click on the plot line a marker will be placed in the map which indicates where the car was at that point in time.<br /> <br /> ===Right click context menu===<br /> When right clicking on the plot there appears a context menu where you can control settings of the plot which are described below. An important thing to note is that even when an element of the plot is hidden you can still change it even though you will not see the change until the element is revealed again.<br /> <br /> ==== Set title====<br /> [[File:Chart elements.png|thumb|These are the different elements of the plot the right click context menu can affect. ]]<br /> With the "Set filename/signalnames as title" button you can switch between having the signals names as the title of the plot or having the filename as the plot title.<br /> <br /> ==== Hide/show title====<br /> By pressing the "Hide/Show chart title" button you will either make the title disappear or reappear.<br /> <br /> ====Hide/show Y-Axes titles====<br /> By pressing the "Hide/Show yaxis titles" button the titles on the all the yaxes will disappear or reappear.<br /> <br /> ====Hide/Show Y-Axes====<br /> With the "Hide/Show YAxes" button you will make all the YAxes disappear or reappear (including the axis titles).</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Preview_data&diff=3404 Preview data 2023-06-30T12:58:39Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: continued rewriting this page to reflect 2.84</p> <hr /> <div>'''<big>THIS PAGE IS IN THE MIDDLE OF EDITING. TOO SEE THE OLD VERSION SCROLL DOWN TO "How to use".</big>''' <br /> <br /> == Source List ==<br /> The source list is a list of all source files that have been added to the signal preview. Here you chose which file you want to view signals from by clicking on it and when switching between sources they will try to keep selections as similar as possible. This means that if 2 sources share signals and you select and plot a shared signal in one source and then switch to the other the signal will stay selected and plotted. <br /> <br /> At the bottom of the source list you can switch between showing the sources as their filenames or as their measurement dates. <br /> <br /> === Adding/removing source files without loosing setting and selections ===<br /> At the bottom left of the screen you can press the button "Add more files" to add new files and remove current files without removing your settings or which signals are selected. By pressing this button the tasks panel will re-open but with a second list of files at the bottom which shows the selected files in the preview. <br /> <br /> To add new files you search for the file you want to add and drag it from the top box to the bottom box where it will now appear. <br /> <br /> To remove a file you drag it from the bottom box to the top box which makes the file disappear in the bottom box.<br /> <br /> When you are done adding and removing files you press the button "Add Files to preview" at the right side of the screen to get back to the preview with the files from the bottom box.<br /> <br /> ==Signal List ==<br /> [[File:Signal list.png|thumb|From left to right is the button to show/hide modules, apply signal selections and save signal selections]]<br /> From the signal list you select which signals you want to view from the selected source. To help you find which signals you want to view there is a search bar at the top of the list. You can also at the bottom of the list select to see signals from a specific module.<br /> <br /> === Save signal selection===<br /> If you want to save a set of selected signals for suture use you start by selecting the signals you want to save and then pressing the "Save selection" button on the bottom of the signal list. This will open a small window where you first need to enter a name and then press "Save collection" to save your selected signals.<br /> <br /> ===Apply saved signal selection ===<br /> To apply a saved set of selected signals you will press the "Apply signals" button which opens a small window. Here you will see all saved sets and you can apply one by selecting the one you want to apply and click "Apply collection". Note that this will only select and not deselect signals so if you only want to have the signals in the set selected you first need to make sure that no signals are selected (which can be done with the "Unselect all signals" button).<br /> <br /> ===Show/Hide module prefix===<br /> If you want to have the module name as a prefix to the signal name you can enable that by pressing the "Show modules button" and you can also disable it by pressing the "Hide modules" button. Note that this also affects the signal names in the dashboards signal preview.<br /> <br /> == Dashboard==<br /> <br /> ===Signal preview===<br /> <br /> ===File information===<br /> <br /> ===Data export===<br /> <br /> ===Statistics===<br /> <br /> ===Plot Options===<br /> <br /> ===Audio Playback ===<br /> <br /> ==Master Preview==<br /> <br /> ===Preview Modes===<br /> [[File:Plot button.png|left|frameless]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> "Master signal preview" has four different preview modes which you can select from the bottom left corner of the "Master signal preview" window:<br /> # View only one plot<br /> #View a plot, and video side by side<br /> #View a plot and GPS data visualization side by side (this is the default view)<br /> <br /> ====Integrated video and audio preview====<br /> [[File:Video-in-preview.png|thumb|400x400px| Preview Data Window - Video]]If video mode is selected then the preview tool will automatically detect if there is any video correlated to the currently selected file. If such video exists, a media controller chart will be visible below the main play. See screenshot "Preview Data Window - Video".<br /> <br /> There are several ways of controlling the playback for the found media measurements. By default the playback starts from time = 0 when the user clicks the play icon in toolstrip below the media chart. If there is any media file at the current position (as in the example) the playback of the measurements is automatically started. One can also choose to start from a certain position by either clicking between the audio and video bars in the chart or by ctrl+left mouse click on the plot in the main chart.<br /> <br /> When the playback is started, the red marker is moving in the two grids and the play button is replaced by the pause button. Simply click the pause button to pause the playback.<br /> <br /> To stop and revert the playback to the start position, click the stop button. The left and right buttons to the right of the stop buttons are used to jump to the nearest media measurement on the timeline.<br /> <br /> If both audio and video measurements exists (like in the example) one can choose to only play the video measurement by clicking the video measurement bar in the graph. This also applies to when there are multiple overlapping videos.<br /> <br /> If there are multiple overlapping videos, on of the videos can be viewed in "picture in picture-mode". To enable this, click the three dots in the bottom right corner of the video and select "Picture in picture" in the sub menu appearing.<br /> <br /> This can of course also be used for a single video as well.[[File:Map-in-preview.png|thumb|Preview Data Window - GPS<br /> ]]<br /> <br /> ====Integrated GPS data visualization ====<br /> By default the map will be set to display a plot, along side of a map. Once a signal is selected and pushed up into the mater signal preview any available GPS data will be visualized in the map, see Figure "Preview Data Window - GPS". If you click on the plot line a marker will be placed in the map which indicates where the car was at that point in time.<br /> <br /> ===Right click context menu===<br /> <br /> ==== Set title====<br /> <br /> ==== Hide/show title====<br /> <br /> ====Hide/show Y-Axes titles====<br /> <br /> ====Hide/Show Y-Axes==== <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> This is a tool used to graph signal values from MDF-files, preview Video and visualize GPS-data. <br /> <br /> ==How to use==<br /> #Select a "Source" (file or measurement) from the source list on the left hand side of the screen<br /> #A list of signals will show up in the signal list on the right hand side of the screen. Select one or more.<br /> #Each selected signal will show up as a thumbnail at the bottom of the screen<br /> #In order to inspect a signal more closely, double click or "drag and drop" the signal into the Master signal preview.<br /> #If there is any GPS data available, then that data will be visualized in the map.<br /> # If there is any video or audio data available, then a media controller is visible below the main plot. '''See [[Preview data#Integrated video and audio preview|Preview data#Integrated video and audio]]'''<br /> <br /> ==Integrated video and audio preview==<br /> To see what videos are available a signal needs to be selected and inserted into the master signal preview.<br /> <br /> The preview tool will automatically detect if there is any video correlated to the currently selected file. If such video exists, a media controller chart will be visible below the main play. See screenshot "Preview Data Window - Video and Audio".<br /> <br /> ===Control playback of audio and video measurements ===<br /> There are several ways of controlling the playback for the found media measurements. By default the playback starts from time = 0 when the user clicks the play icon in toolstrip below the media chart. If there is any media file at the current position (as in the example) the playback of the measurements is automatically started. One can also choose to start from a certain position by either clicking between the audio and video bars in the chart or by ctrl+left mouse click on the plot in the main chart.<br /> <br /> When the playback is started, the red marker is moving in the two grids and the play button is replaced by the pause button. Simply click the pause button to pause the playback.<br /> <br /> To stop and revert the playback to the start position, click the stop button. The left and right buttons to the right of the stop buttons are used to jump to the nearest media measurement on the timeline.<br /> <br /> If both audio and video measurements exists (like in the example) one can choose to only play the video measurement by clicking the video measurement bar in the graph. This also applies to when there are multiple overlapping videos.<br /> <br /> If there are multiple overlapping videos, on of the videos can be viewed in "picture in picture-mode". To enable this, click the three dots in the bottom right corner of the video and select "Picture in picture" in the sub menu appearing.<br /> <br /> This can of course also be used for a single video as well.<br /> <br /> ==Integrated GPS data visualization==<br /> By default the map will be set to display a plot, along side of a map. Once a signal is selected and pushed up into the mater signal preview any available GPS data will be visualized in the map, see Figure "Preview Data Window - GPS". If you click on the plot line a marker will be placed in the map which indicates where the car was at that point in time.<br /> <br /> ==Y-axis scaling==<br /> By default the vertical axis is scaled based on a signals predetermined minimum and maximum values which are embedded into the MDF file. This has two advantages. Primarily it makes the same signal from two different measurements easier to compare, but it should also help display the signal using a scale that is relevant for that particular signal. There are however a set of circumstances in which this principle is abandoned in favor of auto fit:<br /> *If the signal has no default min/max values<br /> *If the signals min value is greater than its max value<br /> * If the actual signal is outside of the predetermined min/max bounds.<br /> *If the predetermined max is a lot higher than the actual max of the signal. This is to prevent the previewed signal from being displayed as nothing but a flat line at the bottom of the graph.<br /> If any of these conditions are true, then the vertical min/max will be automatically fitted to the curve based on the curves extreme values.<br /> <br /> ==Plot toolbar==<br /> <br /> ===Preview modes===<br /> [[File:Preview-views.png|frameless]]<br /> <br /> "Master signal preview" has four different preview modes which you can select from the bottom left corner of the "Master signal preview" window: <br /> #View only one plot<br /> #View two plots side by side<br /> #View a plot, and video side by side<br /> #View a plot and GPS data visualization side by side (this is the default view)<br /> <br /> ===Window size ===<br /> If you want to have a bigger "Master signal preview" you can press the fullscreen button on the bottom right of the Master signal preview window, or you can manually hide other areas you do not wish to see by pressing the "H" on them. To show the areas again you can press the "S".<br /> <br /> ===Switching between plots===<br /> There are always two plots even though there might only be one shown. This means you can always use the button "Switch" to make the plots switch places. When there are two plots shown they switch positions but when there is only one plot shown the shown plot (the left one) will switch with the hidden plot (the right one). This can be useful when comparing signals.<br /> <br /> === Zooming===<br /> To zoom in on graphs you drag between two points(not necessarily data points) on the graph and it will zoom in between those two points.To zoom out you press "Reset zoom" for L or R depending on which plot you want to zoom out. Notice that "Zoom out (R)" is only clickable when you show two plots and that is because even if there always are two plots you can only zoom out and clear shown plots.<br /> <br /> ===Statistics ===<br /> You can see statistics for the plots and their signal(s) at the bottom under the tab "Statistics". To the left you have a button for if you want to show the left or right plot. What being showed is the plots signal and x/y min/max, mean value, standard devation, total amount of data samples and shown amount of data samples for each signal. Note that the plot can only show 500 samples for each signal and therefore need to hide samples for bigger signals. The plot will always try to have an as even as possible space between the samples and if it is showing a signal with 502 signals it will show 251 as it will give the smoothest and most accurate view even if its not showing as many samples as it could.<br /> <br /> ==Other features ==<br /> <br /> ===Export options===<br /> At the bottom you can also download a plot as a text file. Under the tab "Data export" you select which plot you want to download, select between which time values it should download data points, set a download description (optional) and then press "To text file" to make the file ready for download. The text file you download is supported in Excel.<br /> <br /> ===Saving signals===<br /> You can save the currently selected signals by pressing the signal symbol with a plus on it located on the bottom right of the "Signal List". This allows you to reload these signals in any source as long as that source contains signals with exactly matching names.<br /> <br /> ===Quick selection mode===<br /> This selection mode allows you preview the same set of signals from an array of files with ease. Here is how it works:<br /> #This requires you to have selected two or more files before you entered the signal preview interface.<br /> #Beneath the source list to the left you will find a checkbox that says "Quick selection mode". Click it.<br /> #Select a file by clicking on a file in the source list.<br /> #Select any number of signals in the signal list.<br /> #If you want to add any of the signals into the master preview, then do so by dragging and dropping (or double clicking) the thumbnails as usual.<br /> #You can now swap between files by selecting any file you like from the source list. When you swap file the signals you selected previously will now be selected again in the new file.<br /> '''Notice: This will only work if both files have signals with the exact same name. Any deviation in signal naming will cause the program to be unable to find the signal, thus skipping it and moving on to the next signal'''</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Signal_list.png&diff=3403 File:Signal list.png 2023-06-30T12:41:13Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: Carl.ridderstolpe uploaded a new version of File:Signal list.png</p> <hr /> <div>Shows the buttons to add/apply modules as prefixes and save/apply selected signals</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Signal_list.png&diff=3402 File:Signal list.png 2023-06-30T12:33:28Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>Shows the buttons to add/apply modules as prefixes and save/apply selected signals</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Preview_data&diff=3401 Preview data 2023-06-30T09:33:19Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: started rewriting this page</p> <hr /> <div>THIS PAGE IS IN THE MIDDLE OF EDITING. TOO SEE THE OLD VERSION SCROLL DOWN TO "How to use", TOO SEE A GUIDE TO THE NEW FEATURES WAIT A COUPLE OF HOURS. <br /> <br /> == Source List ==<br /> The source list is a list of all source files that have been added to the signal preview. Here you chose which file you want to view signals from by clicking on it and when switching between sources they will try to keep selections as similar as possible. This means that if 2 sources share signals and you select and plot a shared signal in one source and then switch to the other the signal will stay selected and plotted. <br /> <br /> At the bottom of the source list you can switch between showing the sources as their filenames or as their measurement dates. <br /> <br /> === Adding/removing source files without loosing setting and selections ===<br /> At the bottom left of the screen you can press the button "Add more files" to add new files and remove current files without removing your settings or which signals are selected. By pressing this button the tasks panel will re-open but with a second list of files at the bottom which shows the selected files in the preview. <br /> <br /> To add new files you search for the file you want to add and drag it from the top box to the bottom box where it will now appear. <br /> <br /> To remove a file you drag it from the bottom box to the top box which makes the file disappear in the bottom box.<br /> <br /> When you are done adding and removing files you press the button "Add FIles to preview" at the right side of the screen to get back to the preview.<br /> <br /> == Signal List ==<br /> <br /> === Save signal selection ===<br /> <br /> === Apply saved signal selection ===<br /> <br /> === Show/Hide module prefix ===<br /> <br /> == Dashboard ==<br /> <br /> === Signal preview ===<br /> <br /> === File information ===<br /> <br /> === Data export ===<br /> <br /> === Statistics ===<br /> <br /> === Plot Options ===<br /> <br /> === Audio Playback ===<br /> <br /> == Master Preview ==<br /> <br /> === Preview Modes ===<br /> [[File:Plot button.png|left|frameless]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> "Master signal preview" has four different preview modes which you can select from the bottom left corner of the "Master signal preview" window:<br /> #View only one plot<br /> #View a plot, and video side by side<br /> #View a plot and GPS data visualization side by side (this is the default view)<br /> <br /> ==== Integrated video and audio preview ====<br /> [[File:Video-in-preview.png|thumb|400x400px| Preview Data Window - Video]]If video mode is selected then the preview tool will automatically detect if there is any video correlated to the currently selected file. If such video exists, a media controller chart will be visible below the main play. See screenshot "Preview Data Window - Video".<br /> <br /> There are several ways of controlling the playback for the found media measurements. By default the playback starts from time = 0 when the user clicks the play icon in toolstrip below the media chart. If there is any media file at the current position (as in the example) the playback of the measurements is automatically started. One can also choose to start from a certain position by either clicking between the audio and video bars in the chart or by ctrl+left mouse click on the plot in the main chart.<br /> <br /> When the playback is started, the red marker is moving in the two grids and the play button is replaced by the pause button. Simply click the pause button to pause the playback.<br /> <br /> To stop and revert the playback to the start position, click the stop button. The left and right buttons to the right of the stop buttons are used to jump to the nearest media measurement on the timeline.<br /> <br /> If both audio and video measurements exists (like in the example) one can choose to only play the video measurement by clicking the video measurement bar in the graph. This also applies to when there are multiple overlapping videos.<br /> <br /> If there are multiple overlapping videos, on of the videos can be viewed in "picture in picture-mode". To enable this, click the three dots in the bottom right corner of the video and select "Picture in picture" in the sub menu appearing.<br /> <br /> This can of course also be used for a single video as well.[[File:Map-in-preview.png|thumb|Preview Data Window - GPS<br /> ]]<br /> <br /> ==== Integrated GPS data visualization ====<br /> By default the map will be set to display a plot, along side of a map. Once a signal is selected and pushed up into the mater signal preview any available GPS data will be visualized in the map, see Figure "Preview Data Window - GPS". If you click on the plot line a marker will be placed in the map which indicates where the car was at that point in time.<br /> <br /> === Right click context menu ===<br /> <br /> ==== Set title ====<br /> <br /> ==== Hide/show title ====<br /> <br /> ==== Hide/show Y-Axes titles ====<br /> <br /> ==== Hide/Show Y-Axes ==== <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> This is a tool used to graph signal values from MDF-files, preview Video and visualize GPS-data. <br /> <br /> == How to use ==<br /> # Select a "Source" (file or measurement) from the source list on the left hand side of the screen <br /> # A list of signals will show up in the signal list on the right hand side of the screen. Select one or more. <br /> # Each selected signal will show up as a thumbnail at the bottom of the screen <br /> # In order to inspect a signal more closely, double click or "drag and drop" the signal into the Master signal preview. <br /> # If there is any GPS data available, then that data will be visualized in the map. <br /> # If there is any video or audio data available, then a media controller is visible below the main plot. '''See [[Preview data#Integrated video and audio preview|Preview data#Integrated video and audio]]'''<br /> <br /> == Integrated video and audio preview ==<br /> To see what videos are available a signal needs to be selected and inserted into the master signal preview.<br /> <br /> The preview tool will automatically detect if there is any video correlated to the currently selected file. If such video exists, a media controller chart will be visible below the main play. See screenshot "Preview Data Window - Video and Audio".<br /> <br /> === Control playback of audio and video measurements ===<br /> There are several ways of controlling the playback for the found media measurements. By default the playback starts from time = 0 when the user clicks the play icon in toolstrip below the media chart. If there is any media file at the current position (as in the example) the playback of the measurements is automatically started. One can also choose to start from a certain position by either clicking between the audio and video bars in the chart or by ctrl+left mouse click on the plot in the main chart.<br /> <br /> When the playback is started, the red marker is moving in the two grids and the play button is replaced by the pause button. Simply click the pause button to pause the playback.<br /> <br /> To stop and revert the playback to the start position, click the stop button. The left and right buttons to the right of the stop buttons are used to jump to the nearest media measurement on the timeline.<br /> <br /> If both audio and video measurements exists (like in the example) one can choose to only play the video measurement by clicking the video measurement bar in the graph. This also applies to when there are multiple overlapping videos.<br /> <br /> If there are multiple overlapping videos, on of the videos can be viewed in "picture in picture-mode". To enable this, click the three dots in the bottom right corner of the video and select "Picture in picture" in the sub menu appearing.<br /> <br /> This can of course also be used for a single video as well.<br /> <br /> == Integrated GPS data visualization ==<br /> By default the map will be set to display a plot, along side of a map. Once a signal is selected and pushed up into the mater signal preview any available GPS data will be visualized in the map, see Figure "Preview Data Window - GPS". If you click on the plot line a marker will be placed in the map which indicates where the car was at that point in time.<br /> <br /> == Y-axis scaling ==<br /> By default the vertical axis is scaled based on a signals predetermined minimum and maximum values which are embedded into the MDF file. This has two advantages. Primarily it makes the same signal from two different measurements easier to compare, but it should also help display the signal using a scale that is relevant for that particular signal. There are however a set of circumstances in which this principle is abandoned in favor of auto fit:<br /> * If the signal has no default min/max values<br /> * If the signals min value is greater than its max value<br /> * If the actual signal is outside of the predetermined min/max bounds.<br /> * If the predetermined max is a lot higher than the actual max of the signal. This is to prevent the previewed signal from being displayed as nothing but a flat line at the bottom of the graph.<br /> If any of these conditions are true, then the vertical min/max will be automatically fitted to the curve based on the curves extreme values.<br /> <br /> == Plot toolbar ==<br /> <br /> === Preview modes ===<br /> [[File:Preview-views.png|frameless]]<br /> <br /> "Master signal preview" has four different preview modes which you can select from the bottom left corner of the "Master signal preview" window: <br /> # View only one plot<br /> # View two plots side by side<br /> # View a plot, and video side by side<br /> # View a plot and GPS data visualization side by side (this is the default view)<br /> <br /> === Window size ===<br /> If you want to have a bigger "Master signal preview" you can press the fullscreen button on the bottom right of the Master signal preview window, or you can manually hide other areas you do not wish to see by pressing the "H" on them. To show the areas again you can press the "S".<br /> <br /> === Switching between plots ===<br /> There are always two plots even though there might only be one shown. This means you can always use the button "Switch" to make the plots switch places. When there are two plots shown they switch positions but when there is only one plot shown the shown plot (the left one) will switch with the hidden plot (the right one). This can be useful when comparing signals.<br /> <br /> === Zooming ===<br /> To zoom in on graphs you drag between two points(not necessarily data points) on the graf and it will zoom in between those two points.To zoom out you press "Reset zoom" for L or R depending on which plot you want to zoom out. Notice that "Zoom out (R)" is only clickable when you show two plots and that is because even if there always are two plots you can only zoom out and clear shown plots.<br /> <br /> === Statistics ===<br /> You can see statistics for the plots and their signal(s) at the bottom under the tab "Statistics". To the left you have a button for if you want to show the left or right plot. What being showed is the plots signal and x/y min/max, mean value, standard devation, total amount of data samples and shown amount of data samples for each signal. Note that the plot can only show 500 samples for each signal and therefore need to hide samples for bigger signals. The plot will always try to have an as even as possible space between the samples and if it is showing a signal with 502 signals it will show 251 as it will give the smoothest and most accurate view even if its not showing as many samples as it could.<br /> <br /> == Other features ==<br /> <br /> === Export options ===<br /> At the bottom you can also download a plot as a text file. Under the tab "Data export" you select which plot you want to download, select between which time values it should download data points, set a download description (optional) and then press "To text file" to make the file ready for download. The text file you download is supported in Excel.<br /> <br /> === Saving signals ===<br /> You can save the currently selected signals by pressing the signal symbol with a plus on it located on the bottom right of the "Signal List". This allows you to reload these signals in any source as long as that source contains signals with exactly matching names.<br /> <br /> === Quick selection mode ===<br /> This selection mode allows you preview the same set of signals from an array of files with ease. Here is how it works:<br /> # This requires you to have selected two or more files before you entered the signal preview interface.<br /> # Beneath the source list to the left you will find a checkbox that says "Quick selection mode". Click it.<br /> # Select a file by clicking on a file in the source list.<br /> # Select any number of signals in the signal list.<br /> # If you want to add any of the signals into the master preview, then do so by dragging and dropping (or double clicking) the thumbnails as usual.<br /> # You can now swap between files by selecting any file you like from the source list. When you swap file the signals you selected previously will now be selected again in the new file.<br /> '''Notice: This will only work if both files have signals with the exact same name. Any deviation in signal naming will cause the program to be unable to find the signal, thus skipping it and moving on to the next signal'''</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Chart_elements.png&diff=3376 File:Chart elements.png 2023-06-26T11:49:03Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>picture showing the different chart elements</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Add_more_files_to_preview.png&diff=3375 File:Add more files to preview.png 2023-06-26T08:47:25Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>the screen that comes up when pressing add more files to repview</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.84&diff=3371 New features in v2.84 2023-06-26T06:17:51Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: changed title to something more coherant</p> <hr /> <div>== Added context menu for some plot options in the signal preview ==<br /> Added a context menu in the signal preview when you rightclick the plot. The menu gives you the opportunity to toggle the visibility of the chart title, the y-axes titles and the y-axes themselves. It also gives you the option to toggle between having the file name or signal names as the plot title.<br /> == Imporved the tooltip when hovering over the plot ==<br /> The tooltip that appears when you hover over the plot in the signal preview now showcase the value of all signals and just not the one closest to the cursor.<br /> == Added functionality to add more files to plot without loosing signal selection ==<br /> When viewing signals in the signal preview you can now add more files without loosing the settings or selections of your current plot. This is done by pressing the new "add more files button" which takes you back where you can drag new files in and also drag old files out.<br /> == Show/hide module button of signal preview improved ==<br /> The show/hide module button in the signal preview now applies the module names to the signal list and the signal preview instead of only effecting the signal list.<br /> == Allow more signals in the signal preview ==<br /> The max number of signals in a plot is now removed so a user can have infinitely many signals in a single plot.<br /> == Fixed bug step function bug in signal preview ==<br /> Fixed so that signals are more correctly identified as step plots or not. Making them be drawn correctly and also improving performance for certain signals.</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Plot_button.png&diff=3370 File:Plot button.png 2023-06-26T06:14:25Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>Button which select what kind of plot you want</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=New_features_in_v2.84&diff=3369 New features in v2.84 2023-06-22T14:50:38Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>== Signal preview context menu for plot options ==<br /> Added a context menu in the signal preview when you rightclick the plot. The menu gives you the opportunity to toggle the visibility of the chart title, the y-axes titles and the y-axes themselves. It also gives you the option to toggle between having the file name or signal names as the plot title.<br /> == Imporved the tooltip when hovering over the plot ==<br /> The tooltip that appears when you hover over the plot in the signal preview now showcase the value of all signals and just not the one closest to the cursor.<br /> == Added functionality to add more files to plot without loosing signal selection ==<br /> When viewing signals in the signal preview you can now add more files without loosing the settings or selections of your current plot. This is done by pressing the new "add more files button" which takes you back where you can drag new files in and also drag old files out.<br /> == Show/hide module button of signal preview improved ==<br /> The show/hide module button in the signal preview now applies the module names to the signal list and the signal preview instead of only effecting the signal list.<br /> == Allow more signals in the signal preview ==<br /> The max number of signals in a plot is now removed so a user can have infinitely many signals in a single plot.<br /> == Fixed bug step function bug in signal preview ==<br /> Fixed so that signals are more correctly identified as step plots or not. Making them be drawn correctly and also improving performance for certain signals.</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Creating_a_Task&diff=796 Creating a Task 2017-07-21T13:50:27Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>= Creating a Task=</includeonly><br /> You create a new task by pressing the "New Task" button on the bottom of the screen. This will open a window with one tab for each assignment. Here we will go through how to create a task with all nine kinds of assignments. Note that step 3-7 on MCD-Hub is identical on all assignments so it will not be described to avoid this being repetitive.[[File:Illustration5.png|illustration 1: MCD-Hub|400x400px|thumb|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration5.png]]<br /> ===MCD-Hub===<br /> MCD-Hub assignments are used to collect data using the MCD-Hub flight recorder. This assignment tab has seven areas (as shown in illustration 1) with one function each that is used accordingly:<br /> <br /> 1. Selecting which MCD-Hub assignment file to use. Press "Bläddra"/"Browse" to bring up the file selection where you select the .hub file to use.<br /> <br /> 2. Choose which formats the MCD-Hub result files should be converted to when result files are uploaded to the portal from a WCU. <br /> <br /> 3. Write a descriptive text for the assignment. (optional)<br /> <br /> 4. Choose if you want to be notified by email if the assignment fails to start. if you have not filled in an email adress you will get oppurtunity when pressing ok. (optional)<br /> <br /> 5. Assign owner and the period of validity to the assignment. This is filled automatically and is optionally changed.<br /> <br /> 6. This option is under construction, do not use except for special cases.<br /> <br /> 7. Start searching and selecting a WCU by pressing add resources at the bottom left of the screen. There you will get a pop up with 2 boxes, the upper one for searching cars and the bottom one for selected cars. In the top one you can search WCU units with ten different parameters by writing a value and pressing search or ENTER. to select a WCU you drag it from the top to the bottom box so that it appears in the bottom one.<br /> <br /> After you press Ok and make the transfer there will be a pop-up telling you "Transfer ok!" if the transfer and checks went well, otherwise there will be a pop-up showing you an error cause.<br /> ===CAN-recorder===<br /> [[File:Illustration6.png|thumb|Illustration 2: Canrecorder|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration6.png]]Canrecorder is a measurement module that allows CAN frames to be captured and logged. This assignment has 4 functions described in illustration 2 and below:<br /> <br /> 1. Turning on or off CAN frame pass through filter. If you choose to have the filter on you must specify which CAN bus or CAN buses you wish to record. If you do not have the filter on you should not specify a CAN bus.<br /> <br /> 2. Choose if you want to record with the high speed CAN bus and/or the low speed can bus.<br /> <br /> 3. Specify which CAN buses you want to record by entering their ID and then pressing enter. This should only be done if the CAN frame passthrough filter is turned on.<br /> <br /> 4. Select how much time to record before and after the trigger.<br /> ===IDC===<br /> Internal Diagnostic Client (IDC) is a measurement module that allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent and responses recorded. The sequence of diagnostic requests are uploaded to the portal as a text file (usually ending with ".seq").<br /> <br /> When assigning an IDC assignment it is identical to a MCD-Hub assignment except the file you select must be a .seq file and you can not choose conversion format.<br /> ===SoH===<br /> [[File:Illustration7.png|353x353px|Illustration 3: SoH tab|thumb|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration7.png]]The State of Health (SoH) assignment collects specific status information from vechiles. You select which information you want the assignment to collect by filling in one or more of the six boxes shown in illustration 3. In order for SoH data to be correctly interpreted, relevant description files (SDDB/GDS) for the vehicles executing the SoH assignment must have been defined. To add a SDDB/GDS file to a vehicle, see [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog|The Edit Car Dialog]].The six different options are:<br /> *Mileage<br /> *Voltage<br /> *Read ECU software numbers<br /> *Read ECU DTC:s<br /> *Read OBD-II PIDs<br /> *App Diagnotstic Db Part Num<br /> ===Signal Reader===<br /> [[File:Illustration8.png|thumb|Illustration 4: Signal reader assignment.|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration8.png]]Signal Reader is a measurement module that allows monitoring and logging of CAN-bus signals, as well as diagnostics data. Signal Reader performs more or less the same kind of measurements as the MCD-Hub but it has other functions at its disposal. Those other functions are described below and shown in illustration 4:<br /> <br /> 1. You select the file you want. It must be a .haf file which is a text version of .hub a file.<br /> <br /> 2. When you have selected a file and WCU unit(s) the buses defined in the file and the WCU will be mapped but if they can not it will come a pop-up. In the pop-up window you will have to map the different buses to eachother manually. You can always map the buses manually by selecting "Manual mapping" and then pressing mappings at the top. Read more about this in [[I/O configurations]] and [[Mappings]].<br /> <br /> 3. With a Signal Reader assignment you can follow WCU signals live by selecting "Monitor signals". When selected it will come up two boxes under the task description. In the left one you search for signals and drag them over to the right one where the monitored signals are. You can later se the monitored signals through the vehicles tab. It is also possible to copy the signals text in the bottom right corner of the right box. Next to the copy text button you can also paste signals as text where the pasted signal names will be matched against the list of unselected signals<br /> <br /> 4. You can choose if you want the signals to have their source modules names as a prefix.<br /> ===SWDL===<br /> A Software Download (SWDL) task updates the ECU software in one or more ECUs in one or more vehicles. A number of Versatile Binary Format (VBF) files containing the ECU software need to be supplied, along with PIN codes to allow security access to re-program the ECUs.<br /> ===ETAS===<br /> Through an ETAS task, an ETAS ES720 Drive Recorder system can be conillustrationed, and measurement data offloaded, and accessed through the WICE Portal.<br /> <br /> When assigning an ETAS assignment it is identical to a MCD-Hub assignment except the file you select must be a .exp file and you can not choose conversion format.<br /> ===SoftHub===<br /> The SoftHub is a more recent version of the MCD-Hub measurement system, and a SoftHub task is created much in the same way an MCD-Hub task is.<br /> <br /> When assigning an SoftHub assignment it is identical to a MCD-Hub assignment except the file you select must be a .shub file.<br /> ===Blue piraT===<br /> The blue PiraT is a measurement system from Telemotive AG that can be conillustrationd with measurement set-ups, and data accessed through the WICE Portal. Note that to use the blue PiraT module, the WCUs to be used need to be preconillustrationd with a special software package. Contact Alkit Communications in order to set this up.</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Quick_Start&diff=795 Quick Start 2017-07-21T13:45:40Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>This chapter takes you on a tour to quickly get acquainted with the WICE Portal to see how it works.<br /> <br /> As the WICE Portal is a web based tool there is no need to install any software on your computer. All you need is a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, which has Javascript enabled. Using the WICE Portal you can for example: See which assignments are running in which car. Check up on each assignment's respective status. Get result files from tasks. And much more.<br /> <br /> In this quick start you will first be introduced to the basic model, and how it is supposed to work. Once the basics has been covered a simple scenario will be presented. This scenario will show how a task you have created is sent to a car and then started. How to download the data generated by a task for further analysis will also be covered.<br /> <br /> __TOC__<br /> <br /> ==Basic Conceptual Model==<br /> [[File:Illustration1.png|alt=|thumb|Figure 1: This image shows how you the user, the WICE portal and the cars in the field are connected. As you see here you as the user access the WCUs and their cars through the portal.]][[File:Illustration2.png|thumb|Figure 2: This figure shows how a task, assignment and WCU correlates. As you see the task is connected with an unspecified amount of WCUs where the task will execute. The task is also connected to one of the nine assignment as its that assignment that the task will be running.|277x277px]]The basic concept of the WICE portal functionality is to run and observe so called tasks. A task is an assignment (MCD-Hub, IDC, Canrecorder, SoH, SignalReader, SWDL, ETAS, Softhub or Blue piraT) to update or collect measurment from one or many cars. Tasks are run and observable when a user starts a task via the WICE portal on a set of Wireless Communication Units (WCUs) located in a set of cars. The portal then dowload the task's assignment to the WCUs when their cars ignition is turned off. Each WCU then runs the task's assignment on its car. The user can then see the task's result on each WCU as the task's assignment will get different results depending on which WCU it ran on. This is because of that a task gives the same assignment to all WCUs but as different WCUs are located in different cars doing different stuff it will collect different data. To recap and illustrate how this works you can look at figure 1 and 2 explaining how this correlates.<br /> [[File:A Simple Scenario.png|thumb|Figure 3: This is how a task can look when it is ready to be created.]]<br /> <br /> ==A Simple Scenario==<br /> Now that we have gone through the concept of the WICE portal we will now give a more concrete example. Lets say you want to create a task with a Statement of Health (SoH) assignment where you collect the cars voltage and mileage. To do this you need to [[The Portal User View#Login|log in]] to the WICE portal with your WICE login (username and password).<br /> <br /> Now that you are logged in you create a new task by clicking the "New Task" button at the bottom of the screen. When pressing the button a dialog will be shown with one tab for each assignment. To make the task a SoH task you click the SoH tab where the options for creating one will be shown. There you will at the top see six different checkboxes with different measurements SoH can collect. Check the boxes for voltage and mileage and scroll down to click "Add reasources". Here it will come up a window where we will search and add WCUs. You can search for a WCU by different criterea and when you have found the WCU(s) you wanted and have dragged them to the bottom box with the selected WCUs you press "Done". Now it should look like it does in figure 3 and you can now press ok to start the task. We dont need to fill the other boxes as we dont need a description, notification about status via email or schedule(sparsely used). That was a quick instruction on how to create a new task but you can read more detailed about how to create every sort of task at [[The Portal User View#Creating a Task|Creating a Task]].<br /> <br /> When the task is done it will have generated results. You can see them searching the WCU(s) you used in the tasks tab (on the home screen). When you have found the WCU and your assignment you can select it and press the "Get Result Files" in the bottom left corner. then you will get a window where you can search among the result files. When you have selected a file you can get the option to get(download), plot the rout for, preview data and view the file. Theres more information about the search tab and viewing results in [[The Portal User View#Tasks Tab|Tasks Tab]]</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:A_Simple_Scenario.png&diff=794 File:A Simple Scenario.png 2017-07-21T13:24:26Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: Carl.ridderstolpe uploaded a new version of File:A Simple Scenario.png</p> <hr /> <div>Figure 3: This is how a task can look when ready to be added</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=The_Portal_User_View&diff=793 The Portal User View 2017-07-21T12:24:43Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>This section will explain all panels and dialog in depth. Both regarding how you use it but also the limitations and some reasons to why it looks like it does. Section 3.1 will describe the meaning of the top level panels. In section 3 through 5 each top level panel will be described in detail.<br /> <br /> <br clear="all"><br /> {{:Login}}<br /> <br /> <br clear="all"><br /> {{:Creating a Task}}<br /> <br /> ==Top level tabs==<br /> On the top level there are four different tabs to choose from. From left to right they are:<br /> #'''Tasks''' Manages your tasks, search among tasks and create new tasks.<br /> #'''Search''' In this tab you search and download result files.<br /> #'''Vehicles''' Manages your vehicles. As vehicles belong to users of the system, you need to assign a vehicle to yourself before you initiate tasks running on it. You can also deassign vehicles when you are finished with them.<br /> #'''Administration''' In this tab you can administer your name, email-address, password and a few other things.<br /> <br /> With these three tabs you can do all the work that is needed to start, stop and handle data to and from vehicles. A figure of the tabs is presented in Illustration 5 below.<br /> [[File:Illustration11 v240.png|frame|left|Illustration 5: The four tabs shown to a user.]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br clear="all"><br /> {{:Tasks Tab}}<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> {{:Search Tab}}<br /> <br clear=all><br /> <br /> {{:Vehicles}}</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Vehicles&diff=792 Vehicles 2017-07-21T10:51:30Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>=Vehicles Tab=</includeonly><br /> This view is used to handle the various vehicles that are assigned to you. A figure of this view<br /> is presented below in Illustration 26. At the top, the red section, is a search area where you<br /> type in the criteria to be used for fetching the vehicles you are interested in. As you enter your<br /> criteria a row count is presented in the upper right area to show how many potential matches<br /> there are. The entries are also fetched as you type but only as many rows as fit your current<br /> view are fetched. As you scroll down more results will be fetched.<br /> [[File:Illustration26.png|none|thumb|700x700px|Illustration 26: The vehicles tab]]<br /> The number of possible columns to show is quite large, 24. The columns shown below are in<br /> default order. You will have to account for any changes you have made your self. The columns<br /> are:<br /> <br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="WCU_ID">WCU ID</span><br /> | The ID of the WCU. An example is MM-320:1<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="WCU_Description">WCU Description</span><br /> | A textual comment attached to the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Last_DRO">Last DRO</span><br /> | Says when the DRO log file was last transferred to the portal.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Last_log">Last log</span><br /> | Shows when the last log file was transferred to the portal.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Upload_size">Upload size</span><br /> | Says what the size, in k bytes, of the last data upload was.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Upload_date">Upload date</span><br /> | Contains which date the last upload was done<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Upload">Upload</span><br /> | This column says how much data has been transferred from the WCU to the portal the last week.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Upload">Upload</span>Car<br /> | The plate number of the car where the WCU is mounted.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Upload">Upload</span>VIN<br /> | Shows the VIN of the car where WCU is mounted.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Upload">Upload</span>Voltage<br /> | The column shows the latest known battery voltage as reported by the CEM.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Mileage">Mileage</span><br /> | The column shows the mileage of the car.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Up-time">Up-time</span><br /> | Shows how many hours the WCU been running the last week.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Distance">Distance</span><br /> | Shows how long the car has been driven the last week.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Project_Id">Project Id</span><br /> | Shows the project ID.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Proto_number">Proto number</span><br /> | Shows the proto number.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="TSU">TSU</span><br /> | Shows the TSU ID.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="WCU_Version">WCU Version</span><br /> | Shows which version the current WCU software has.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Connected">Connected</span><br /> | Shows how many minutes have passed since the WCU made a connection to the WICE portal.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="GDS/SDDB">GDS/SDDB</span><br /> | The name of the GDS/SDDB file used when parsing SoH assignment data.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="WCU_voltage">WCU voltage</span><br /> | Shows the voltage as measured by the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="WCU_storage_usage">WCU storage usage</span><br /> | Shows the amount of storage available to store data on the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | <span id="Series">Series</span><br /> | Shows the series attribute.<br /> |-<br /> |'''WCU name'''<br /> |Shows the name of the WCU<br /> |-<br /> |'''Resource group'''<br /> |The resource group (if any) the WCU is part of.<br /> |-<br /> |'''Platform type'''<br /> |Only from v2.44: Search WCU by platform type.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> Now, as there are so many columns present you have the option of selecting which ones you would like to see by right-clicking on the table header. If you would like your selection to be remembered between sessions, click the “Save headers” button after you have selected your columns.<br /> <br /> There is a concept called “resource groups” you should be aware of in this panel. A resource group is simply a way to refer to a group of resources (WCU, Car) collectively. An example is when creating assignments you can select a resource group instead of the individual WCU:s to start a new assignment. Also, when showing the positions on a map, you select a resource group and press “Show position”, all WCU:s in that resource group will show. To see which resources are in a resource group you press the triangle to the left of the row and the row<br /> opens up to show the individual members. To show the members in the view you can rightclick the entry and select the option “find members” from the menu.<br /> <br /> When selecting a row in the table the selected row changes to a blue shade. You can modify<br /> the description of the WCU by clicking in the “Edit Description” button and enter a new description. You can search among the vehicles log files by clicking the “Get log files” button.<br /> <br /> ==Show the WCU Position==<br /> To see the last reported position of a vehicle, click the “Show Position” button which opens up a map view of where the vehicle was last known to be. You can view several vehicles simultaneously by ctrl- or shift-clicking the vehicles you are interested in. An example of the view is shown in Illustration 27 below. <br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration27.png|none|left|frame|Illustration 27: An example vehicle map view.]]<br /> <br /> To the right of the map view is a list of all the vehicles. Each vehicle is labeled with the license plate number and if you click on a vehicle entry on the right, an information pop-up will show for the vehicle. If you click on the marker of a vehicle, a new tab is opened in the browser that shows what Google Maps has to offer on that position.<br /> Also, just moving the mouse pointer over a marker will make the pop-up show.<br /> <br /> Each vehicle is labeled with the license plate number and if you click on a vehicle entry on the right, an information pop-up will show for the vehicle. <br /> If you click on the marker of a vehicle, a new tab is opened in the browser that shows what Google Maps has to offer on that position.<br /> Also, just moving the mouse pointer over a marker will make the pop-up show.<br /> <br /> ==View ECU software==<br /> It is possible to see which ECUs are in the vehicle along with each ECUs software number.<br /> Press the button “ECU SW” after you have selected one vehicle. The following view will be<br /> shown. As you can see in Illustration 29 each ECUs software number is shown along with<br /> when it was read. You can download the list as a tab-separated text file if you press “Download”.<br /> <br /> ==View Trouble Codes==<br /> If an SoH assignment has been enabled to do trouble code read-outs, you can view the trouble codes by selecting the vehicle you are interested in and push the button “View DTCs”. In Illustration 28 below you can see an example of trouble codes. There are three columns in the table. To the left is the ECU name, next when the trouble code was committed to the portal and lastly, the actual trouble code. <br /> If you click in the column for the actual trouble code, a dialog opens with that particular trouble codes. You can extend the size of the dialog in order to examine the trouble codes in more detail.<br /> You can also search the trouble codes as you can see at the top of Illustration 28.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration28.png|none|left|frame|Illustration 28: Viewing trouble codes.]]<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration29.png|none|left|frame|Illustration 29: ECU Software Versions.]]<br /> <br /> ==Get WCU Up-time==<br /> [[File:Wcu_uptime.png|frame|Illustration 30: WCU up-time dialog.]]<br /> This function is used to get a compilation of the up-time of a set of vehicles during a particular time span. Select the WCUs you are interested in and the click the “Get WCU uptime” button. This brings up the dialog to the right.<br /> <br /> Choose the dates you are interested by choosing a start and end date. Next you have the option of downloading a CSV file, or excel file. The up-time in that file is listed as hours up-time per day per WCU.<br /> The other option is to compile the up-time in a chart shown on screen. The up-time is averaged over the WCUs selected for each day. WCUs having no up-time at all are excluded from the compilation.<br /> <br /> From version 2.42 there is a new feature to display the WCUs uptime based on the data sent from statusd. More info in [[WCU Uptime]].<br /> <br /> ==Export SoH Data==<br /> [[File:Soh data export.png|frame|Illustration 31: The SoH data export panel.]]<br /> You can export data from SoH assignments to your local computer by using the function<br /> “Export SoH data”. Select the cars you are interested in as you can export for more than<br /> one car in one export.<br /> You select the dates you are interested in getting the data from. Check each item you are interested in. Currently you can select mileage, WCU voltage, ECU software versions, battery voltage and storage usage. <br /> The file can be exported in CSV format (suitable for Excel and other spread sheet applications) och XML format.<br /> <br /> ==Resource Groups==<br /> WCUs and cars can collectively be referred to as resources. As such they can be grouped<br /> together and be handled collectively in order to ease the administration of a set of similar individuals. A resource group can consist of both cars and WCUs but usually only<br /> one type of resource is in a resource group.<br /> <br /> You identify a resource group by a gray arrow like icon to the left in the table row. If you<br /> click the icon the entry opens up and makes room for showing which resources are part<br /> of the resource group.<br /> <br /> From version 2.42 the showing of the resource group's resources has been improved. More info can be found in [[Resource group's resources]].<br /> <br /> When a new task is created any resource groups assigned to you will show up in addition to individual WCUs. There is, however, no indication as to the particular entry is a<br /> resource group or not. If you select a resource group, the new assignment will be downloaded to all the WCUs that are part of the resource group.<br /> As a regular user you can not create and remove resource groups, only an administrator<br /> of the portal can do this.<br /> <br /> From version 2.42 of the portal it is easier to search out members of resource groups using the "Resource group" column. When searching in this column one will get results that either matches the name of a resource group WCU or WCUs that are part of a resource group that matches the search criteria. In other words, if we search for "ABCD" we will get the resource group "ABCD" together with all WCUs that are part of the "ABCD" group.<br /> <br /> This column can also be used to list all WCUs that are not part of any resource group. To perform this search, put "^$" in the "Resource group" column.<br /> <br /> ==Modules==<br /> If you have the right permission you might be able to view a WCU:s modules or even<br /> edit them. A module is a functionality of the WCU. Currently the functionalities are:<br /> * MCD-Hub<br /> * Canrecorder<br /> * GPS<br /> * IDC<br /> * Uptime<br /> * State of Health<br /> * Signal Reader<br /> * ETAS<br /> * SoftHub<br /> * Rapid Prototyping (RP)<br /> * Blue piraT</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Illustration26.png&diff=791 File:Illustration26.png 2017-07-21T10:47:22Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: Carl.ridderstolpe uploaded a new version of File:Illustration26.png</p> <hr /> <div></div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Tasks_Tab&diff=790 Tasks Tab 2017-07-21T08:34:19Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>= Tasks Tab=</includeonly><br /> <div class="keywords"> Regexp, regex, reg ex, regual expression </div><br /> [[File:Illustration14.png|thumb|The search panel for finding tasks.]]<br /> In the task tab you can search for tasks, view their assignment, see the log files, see the result files, manage assignments, and much more.<br /> <br /> ==The Search Fields Section==<br /> The search field section consists of different columns where most have a field where you can insert search criteria to find assignments. As an example you have the label “Task ID:” which searches the field for task IDs matching your search criteria. When searching for tasks you can fill in one or more columns where the different search criteria will be treated with a logical AND between eachother.<br /> <br /> There are 21 different columns where some you can fill in a search criteria and some you can not. Below is a table with all the columns followed by a quick description. Note that the columns with a star is the one where you can put in search criteria to filter results.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> !Task ID*<br /> |The nummeric Task ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Assignmnet*<br /> |The assignment's name.<br /> |-<br /> !Type*<br /> |Different options for assignment types where one or more can be selected.<br /> |-<br /> !WCU ID*<br /> |The WCU's ID and also the column where you see the WCU's label.<br /> |-<br /> !Upload size<br /> |The upload size of all the assignment's uploads given in Kbytes.<br /> |-<br /> !Plate number*<br /> |The car's plate number.<br /> |-<br /> !Status*<br /> |Different options for assignment statuses where one or more can be selected.<br /> |-<br /> !Last log<br /> |When the last log file was transferred to the portal.<br /> |-<br /> !Last upload<br /> |Date of the assignments's last upload.<br /> |-<br /> !VIN*<br /> |The car's VIN ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Proto number*<br /> |The proto number.<br /> |-<br /> !Project*<br /> |The project ID.<br /> |-<br /> !TSU*<br /> |The TSU ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Car comment*<br /> |The car's comment/description.<br /> |-<br /> !Series*<br /> |The series attribut.<br /> |-<br /> !Message*<br /> |The assignment's status message.<br /> |-<br /> !WCU name*<br /> |The name of the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> !Task owner<br /> |The current owner of the task.<br /> |-<br /> !Expire date<br /> |The date the assignment will expire.<br /> |-<br /> !Task creator<br /> |The original creator of the task.<br /> |-<br /> !Creation date<br /> |The creation date of the assignment.<br /> |}<br /> In every collumn you can use regular expressions for your searches. To designate an "all" search you enter a period (".") for that particular field or leave it empty if another field is already filled. All searches are treated with the letters as wild-cards. An example is if you intend to search for tasks containing the word “bear” simply enter “bear” in the text field. Now, if there are tasks with the names “bear”, “polar bear”and “unbearable” all of these will match as they contain the word “bear” somewhere.<br /> <br /> To search for a range of WCUs, assume the WCUs MM-810:1 – MM-823:1, you enter the query 81[0-9]|82[0-3]. This is a regular expression where the first expression, 81[0-9], means that we want our search to start with an '8' followed by a '1' and then any digit in range 0-9. The second part, 82[0-3], means an '8' followed by a '2' and then any digit in range 0-3. The two expressions are combined with a pipe characater ("|") which means logical OR. In other words we are looking for range 810-819 OR 820-823.<br /> <br /> '''Note!''' If your WCU/resource group you are searching for has special characters (like '(' or '/') in its name you may need to escape these characters in order to get the desired result. Escape means putting a '\' before the special character. For example if you want to enter (and search for) the resource group name 'ABC(Alpha_Bravo_Charlie)' you need to write 'ABC\(Alpha\_Bravo\_Charlie\)'. Another example is when you want to list a WCU that contains "07-51" in its name. In this case you need to type "07\-51", otherwise the "-" character will make the searcher to search for a range of numbers.<br /> <br /> For more info how to use regular expressions, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression#Standards Regular Expressions]<br /> <br /> When you are filling in search criteria you can see in the top right corner how WICE says "Rows found:". That tell you how many assignments your search will find so you know if you need to narrow or broaden your search.<br /> <br /> In the bottom right corner you have two binoculars. With these you can save and load your search criterias and shown columns for future uses. You can also set a view of criteria and columns as your default by hovering over the view you want and then pressing the pin button. There is also two magnifying glasses that can save and load your search results so even if their information change and can not be found with the same search criteria you can still find them. You can also pair a search with a view by going to your searches and then on the search click the binocular button and select which view you want to pair it with. You can also pair them going to your searches and press "Select search views" where you get a window with the option to pair your searches with views.<br /> <br /> If you are using an older version than 2.45.0 you have 4 bars with calanders to the right of them. This is a function to search assignments by date of creation and last update. This function has been removed in 2.45.0 and does not work like intended in 2.44.8.<br /> <br /> In 2.45.0 and forward there will at the top be a option to search assignments after their label. By selecting multiple labels you can search for more than one at the same time.<br /> <br /> == The Result Section ==<br /> The assignments are fetched when you press the "Search" button in the tasks tab. Here we will go through the bottom part of task tab and the options for your previous search.<br /> ===Assignment Options===<br /> You can right-click one or many assignments to get a window with a range of options described below:<br /> * "Show task description" will show you the description of the task that the assignment you right-clicked on belongs <br /> * "Go to Vehicles Panel" will take you to the vehicles tab. When you are in the vehicles tab the car(s) you selected will be shown in the vehicles tab.<br /> * "Go to Search Panel" will take you to the search tab. When you are in the search tab the WCU(s) you selected will be selected in the search tab.<br /> * "Get/Show assignment" will give you a small pop-up with some assignment information and a "Download assignment" button if a download is possible. If you choose to press "Download assignment" the assignment file will be downloaded to your computer in its original format.<br /> * "Edit task" will give you the option to edit ownership and expiration date of the task. It will also show you the WCU(s) the task is running on. <br /> * "Show car info" and "Show WCU info" will give you a pop-up showing you available info of the assignment car and WCU. Depending on which car/WCU you choose there will be different information available since cars/WCUs can lack information. <br /> * "Show message" will show you the assignment's status message. <br /> * "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> * "Event subscription" is an option where you choose to subscibe to a car, a WCU or an assignment. When hovering above "Event subscription" you will see three options, "Connect", "Assignment status" and "Result upload". With the option "Connect " you can subscribe to the selected car(s) or WCU(s) and get notified when their connection status changes. "Assignment status" and "Result upload" subscribes you to selected assignment(s) and gets you notified about status changes and when results are uploaded. You will se events when clicking on the bell symbol at the top which gets a red dot when theres new events from your subscriptions.<br /> <br /> ===Column Options===<br /> The result section have alot of ways to sort, view and handle the result with the columns. When right-clicking a column you will get a window with different options for the column. <br /> * "Sort Ascending" and "Sort Descending" will sort the assignments in ascending or descending order after the column's attribute.<br /> * "Configure Sort" where you can add more levels of sorting so that it sorts for more than one thing in different priority. For example can you sort after task ID ascending and then sort after WCU ID descending. When a column has a sorting prefrens the option "Clear Sort" will appear which clears your sorting prefrences for that column. <br /> * "Columns" opens a window where you can select which columns you want to have shown and which you want to have hidden by checking their boxes or unchecking them. If you remove a column with a filled search criteria that criteria will still matter when you make a new search. Also when you make the new search the column will reappear.<br /> * "Group by" group together the assignments that share the column's attribute value. When they are grouped there will be the option "Ungroup" that ungroups them. <br /> * "Freeze" moves the column to the left corner and freezes it in position so it can be rearranged. If there is alraedy a frozen column till will move next to it as they go from left to right in chronological order. The "freeze" then becomes "Unfreeze" which revertes the freeze. <br /> * "Export to excel" will export the columns and results into an excel file that will get downloaded. <br /> * "Clear all fields" will clear all columns of their criteria. <br /> * "Get help for this column" should take you here.<br /> <br /> ===Get result files===<br /> When selecting a file you can view the result files by pressing "Get Result Files" if there are available result files. That will create a window where you can search, view and download result files. It is also possible to view result files from multiple assignments at the same time by selecting many assignments of the same type (Only possible for signalreader and MCD-Hub).<br /> ====Searching result files====<br /> The window will look different depending on what kind of assignment you selected watching. The different windows all share alot of tools and have the same concept, to search and filter files. In illustration 6 you can see how a MCD-Hub result window looks. This is a great example as this window contains all different tools while all the others can be seen as an MCD-Hub window that does not need and therefore lacks some of the tools. There are some tools that all have and just like when creating a task the common ones are at the top. Below is a description of all tools followed by which assignment window that has them:<br /> <br /> ===== General search functions =====<br /> [[File:Get Result files.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 6: The-MCD-Hub result file window.]]<br /> At the top there are two boxes, labeled "Description" and "Filename", where you can search for files based on their description and filename. The "Description" box is disabled so that you can not type in it. When searching after filename it will search after the not compiled files and not the compiled files. Below those are two other boxes with two checkboxes. The boxes are labeled "From" and "To" and contain dates that can be changed by pressing the calender next to the box. The files are filtered so only files between those two dates are shown. The checkboxes are labeled "Measurement Date" and "Upload to Portal" and only one of them can be checked. The checkboxes tell if the files will be filtered by measurement or upload date. There is also a checkbox labeled "Hide downloaded files" which will filter out already downloaded files but this button is disabled if the checkbox "Compline by portal update date" is checked. These tools are the same for all type of assignments and can be seen as marked green in illustration 6. <br /> <br /> ===== GPX inclusion =====<br /> The checkbox "Include GPX" enables gpx files to be downloaded when downloading result files. That means each downloaded result file will have a corresponding gpx file containing the route of the car when the assignment was executed. Note that the en date for the route is 24 hours after the start since assignments does not always have end dates. ETAS, Softhub, SignalReader and MCD-Hub assignments has this tool and its marked pink in illustration 6. <br /> <br /> ===== File type filters =====<br /> There are three areas of checkboxes that are framed by a blue line and a sqaure checkbox labeled "Raw". The areas and the checkbox filter what type of files are shown. The framed areas stand for one filetype with their own subgroups. The areas are labeled with what file type they filter. When the square checkbox in the framed area is checked it will show you that areas file type. When their square checkbox is not checked the other checkboxes are disabled as they are the subgroups for that file type. The "Raw" checkbox is simpler as it only stands for if you want to show raw files and lacks subgroups. As with the other search functions in the WICE portal leaving all filters empty will result in everything being shown. The area labeled "Text" has 3 other checkboxes which will show you "Common", "Separate" and "All" text files. Note that not all text files have the subtype "Common" or "Seprate" and can only be shown in "All". The area labeled "MDF" has two other checkboxes which will you mdf files "With module names" or "Without module names" as a prefix for the signalnames. The area labeled "Vector" has two other checkboxes which will show you files refering to frames by "Frame ID" or "Frame name". MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have these tools but do not that Signalreader does not have the "Raw" button and can show all text files. These tools are marked blue in illustration 6. <br /> <br /> ===== Compile by upload date =====<br /> The checkbox "Compile by portal upload date" will compile result files in a conteporary zip file if they were uploaded at the same time. When the files are compiled alot of functions that usually works on result files works differently or does not work as the zip file does not really exist or that its more than one file. As mentioned before you can not search for the compiled file since it does not exist. But when searching with this option turned on the compiled file will show up if one or more of the files it contains match the search criteria. This tools is automatically turned on since you are often looking after a specifik upload. MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have this tool and it is marked yellow in illustration 6.<br /> ====Handling result files====<br /> When you have selected the result file(s) you want different buttons will be active depending on the file. The buttons are above the column bar and its where you download, view and convert result files. <br /> <br /> "Get file(s)", "Get all files" and "Get log files" will open a dialog to [[Downloading Files|download]] selected files, all files or that dates log files. In the dialog you will get the option to add a description, when downloading result files you can also add plate number and/or VIN to the file name. Note that downloading log files from multiple result files will download only log files 24 after the oldest result files so download log files from result files one result file at a time. <br /> <br /> "Save Headers" saves your current view of columns and files and saves it as default. This button has since been replaced by the two binoculars that are described in The Portal User View#The Search Fields Section. We therefore advice you to use the new and improved binoculars as save headers will be removed. <br /> <br /> "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> "View log files" will view log files from the selected file´s date. When viewing log files from multiple result files at the same time it will show you log files 24 hours after the oldest result file and not from both dates. you can always change the dates when viewing log files to narrow or widen the amount of files. When viewing log files you can read them by selecting a file and pressing "View file". There is also the option to "Get file(s)", "Save Headers", "Plot route" and "View file" who are all except "View file" described above. "View file" will open the log file in readable format in your current window. You can also filter log files like you filter result files by date, name and if they are downloaded or not. Note that when selecting to view log files from many files it will show log files from the oldest file's date and 24 hours forward. <br /> <br /> "View file" will open the file in a readable format in you current window. If the file is compiled by upload date or not readable this button will not be enabled. <br /> <br /> "Convert to text" will convert and download selected MDF file(s) to your computer. When doing this you will get a pop-up with the ability to add a description to your download. This is only availible for MDF files and this button can therefore only be found on assignments with MDF files. <br /> <br /> "Preview data" will give you a data preview window where you can preview the selected file(s) data. To read more about how to use this window and all its functions read [[Preview data]].</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Tasks_Tab&diff=789 Tasks Tab 2017-07-21T08:16:48Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>= Tasks Tab=</includeonly><br /> <div class="keywords"> Regexp, regex, reg ex, regual expression </div><br /> [[File:Illustration14.png|thumb|The search panel for finding tasks.]]<br /> In the task tab you can search for tasks, view their assignment, see the log files, see the result files, manage assignments, and much more.<br /> <br /> ==The Search Fields Section==<br /> The search field section consists of different columns where most have a field where you can insert search criteria to find assignments. As an example you have the label “Task ID:” which searches the field for task IDs matching your search criteria. When searching for tasks you can fill in one or more columns where the different search criteria will be treated with a logical AND between eachother.<br /> <br /> There are 21 different columns where some you can fill in a search criteria and some you can not. Below is a table with all the columns followed by a quick description. Note that the columns with a star is the one where you can put in search criteria to filter results.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> !Task ID*<br /> |The nummeric Task ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Assignmnet*<br /> |The assignment's name.<br /> |-<br /> !Type*<br /> |Different options for assignment types where one or more can be selected.<br /> |-<br /> !WCU ID*<br /> |The WCU's ID and also the column where you see the WCU's label.<br /> |-<br /> !Upload size<br /> |The upload size of all the assignment's uploads given in Kbytes.<br /> |-<br /> !Plate number*<br /> |The car's plate number.<br /> |-<br /> !Status*<br /> |Different options for assignment statuses where one or more can be selected.<br /> |-<br /> !Last log<br /> |When the last log file was transferred to the portal.<br /> |-<br /> !Last upload<br /> |Date of the assignments's last upload.<br /> |-<br /> !VIN*<br /> |The car's VIN ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Proto number*<br /> |The proto number.<br /> |-<br /> !Project*<br /> |The project ID.<br /> |-<br /> !TSU*<br /> |The TSU ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Car comment*<br /> |The car's comment/description.<br /> |-<br /> !Series*<br /> |The series attribut.<br /> |-<br /> !Message*<br /> |The assignment's status message.<br /> |-<br /> !WCU name*<br /> |The name of the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> !Task owner<br /> |The current owner of the task.<br /> |-<br /> !Expire date<br /> |The date the assignment will expire.<br /> |-<br /> !Task creator<br /> |The original creator of the task.<br /> |-<br /> !Creation date<br /> |The creation date of the assignment.<br /> |}<br /> In every collumn you can use regular expressions for your searches. To designate an "all" search you enter a period (".") for that particular field or leave it empty if another field is already filled. All searches are treated with the letters as wild-cards. An example is if you intend to search for tasks containing the word “bear” simply enter “bear” in the text field. Now, if there are tasks with the names “bear”, “polar bear”and “unbearable” all of these will match as they contain the word “bear” somewhere.<br /> <br /> To search for a range of WCUs, assume the WCUs MM-810:1 – MM-823:1, you enter the query 81[0-9]|82[0-3]. This is a regular expression where the first expression, 81[0-9], means that we want our search to start with an '8' followed by a '1' and then any digit in range 0-9. The second part, 82[0-3], means an '8' followed by a '2' and then any digit in range 0-3. The two expressions are combined with a pipe characater ("|") which means logical OR. In other words we are looking for range 810-819 OR 820-823.<br /> <br /> '''Note!''' If your WCU/resource group you are searching for has special characters (like '(' or '/') in its name you may need to escape these characters in order to get the desired result. Escape means putting a '\' before the special character. For example if you want to enter (and search for) the resource group name 'ABC(Alpha_Bravo_Charlie)' you need to write 'ABC\(Alpha\_Bravo\_Charlie\)'. Another example is when you want to list a WCU that contains "07-51" in its name. In this case you need to type "07\-51", otherwise the "-" character will make the searcher to search for a range of numbers.<br /> <br /> For more info how to use regular expressions, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression#Standards Regular Expressions]<br /> <br /> When you are filling in search criteria you can see in the top right corner how WICE says "Rows found:". That tell you how many assignments your search will find so you know if you need to narrow or broaden your search.<br /> <br /> In the bottom right corner you have two binoculars. With these you can save and load your search criterias and shown columns for future uses. You can also set a view of criteria and columns as your default by hovering over the view you want and then pressing the pin button. There is also two magnifying glasses that can save and load your search results so even if their information change and can not be found with the same search criteria you can still find them. You can also pair a search with a view by going to your searches and then on the search click the binocular button and select which view you want to pair it with. You can also pair them going to your searches and press "Select search views" where you get a window with the option to pair your searches with views.<br /> <br /> If you are using an older version than 2.45.0 you have 4 bars with calanders to the right of them. This is a function to search assignments by date of creation and last update. This function has been removed in 2.45.0 and does not work like intended in 2.44.8.<br /> <br /> In 2.45.0 and forward there will at the top be a option to search assignments after their label. By selecting multiple labels you can search for more than one at the same time.<br /> <br /> == The Result Section ==<br /> The assignments are fetched when you press the "Search" button in the tasks tab. Here we will go through the bottom part of task tab and the options for your previous search.<br /> ===Assignment Options===<br /> You can right-click one or many assignments to get a window with a range of options described below:<br /> * "Show task description" will show you the description of the task that the assignment you right-clicked on belongs <br /> * "Go to Vehicles Panel" will take you to the vehicles tab. When you are in the vehicles tab the car(s) you selected will be shown in the vehicles tab.<br /> * "Go to Search Panel" will take you to the search tab. When you are in the search tab the WCU(s) you selected will be selected in the search tab.<br /> * "Get/Show assignment" will give you a small pop-up with some assignment information and a "Download assignment" button if a download is possible. If you choose to press "Download assignment" the assignment file will be downloaded to your computer in its original format.<br /> * "Edit task" will give you the option to edit ownership and expiration date of the task. It will also show you the WCU(s) the task is running on. <br /> * "Show car info" and "Show WCU info" will give you a pop-up showing you available info of the assignment car and WCU. Depending on which car/WCU you choose there will be different information available since cars/WCUs can lack information. <br /> * "Show message" will show you the assignment's status message. <br /> * "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> * "Event subscription" is an option where you choose to subscibe to a car, a WCU or an assignment. When hovering above "Event subscription" you will see three options, "Connect", "Assignment status" and "Result upload". With the option "Connect " you can subscribe to the selected car(s) or WCU(s) and get notified when their connection status changes. "Assignment status" and "Result upload" subscribes you to selected assignment(s) and gets you notified about status changes and when results are uploaded. You will se events when clicking on the bell symbol at the top which gets a red dot when theres new events from your subscriptions.<br /> <br /> ===Column Options===<br /> The result section have alot of ways to sort, view and handle the result with the columns. When right-clicking a column you will get a window with different options for the column. <br /> * "Sort Ascending" and "Sort Descending" will sort the assignments in ascending or descending order after the column's attribute.<br /> * "Configure Sort" where you can add more levels of sorting so that it sorts for more than one thing in different priority. For example can you sort after task ID ascending and then sort after WCU ID descending. When a column has a sorting prefrens the option "Clear Sort" will appear which clears your sorting prefrences for that column. <br /> * "Columns" opens a window where you can select which columns you want to have shown and which you want to have hidden by checking their boxes or unchecking them. If you remove a column with a filled search criteria that criteria will still matter when you make a new search. Also when you make the new search the column will reappear.<br /> * "Group by" group together the assignments that share the column's attribute value. When they are grouped there will be the option "Ungroup" that ungroups them. <br /> * "Freeze" moves the column to the left corner and freezes it in position so it can be rearranged. If there is alraedy a frozen column till will move next to it as they go from left to right in chronological order. The "freeze" then becomes "Unfreeze" which revertes the freeze. <br /> * "Export to excel" will export the columns and results into an excel file that will get downloaded. <br /> * "Clear all fields" will clear all columns of their criteria. <br /> * "Get help for this column" should take you here.<br /> <br /> ===Get result files===<br /> When selecting a file you can view the result files by pressing "Get Result Files" if there are available result files. That will create a window where you can search, view and download result files. It is also possible to view result files from multiple assignments at the same time by selecting many assignments of the same type (Only possible for signalreader and MCD-Hub).<br /> ====Searching result files====<br /> The window will look different depending on what kind of assignment you selected watching. The different windows all share alot of tools and have the same concept, to search and filter files. In illustration x you can see how a MCD-Hub result window looks. This is a great example as this window contains all different tools while all the others can be seen as an MCD-Hub window that does not need and therefore lacks some of the tools. There are some tools that all have and just like when creating a task the common ones are at the top. Below is a description of all tools followed by which assignment window that has them:<br /> <br /> ===== General search functions =====<br /> [[File:Get Result files.png|thumb|400x400px|illustration 6: The-MCD-Hub result file window.]]<br /> At the top there are two boxes, labeled "Description" and "Filename", where you can search for files based on their description and filename. The "Description" box is disabled so that you can not type in it. When searching after filename it will search after the not compiled files and not the compiled files. Below those are two other boxes with two checkboxes. The boxes are labeled "From" and "To" and contain dates that can be changed by pressing the calender next to the box. The files are filtered so only files between those two dates are shown. The checkboxes are labeled "Measurement Date" and "Upload to Portal" and only one of them can be checked. The checkboxes tell if the files will be filtered by measurement or upload date. There is also a checkbox labeled "Hide downloaded files" which will filter out already downloaded files but this button is disabled if the checkbox "Compline by portal update date" is checked. These tools are the same for all type of assignments and can be seen as marked green in illustration 6. <br /> <br /> ===== GPX inclusion =====<br /> The checkbox "Include GPX" enables gpx files to be downloaded when downloading result files. That means each downloaded result file will have a corresponding gpx file containing the route of the car when the assignment was executed. Note that the en date for the route is 24 hours after the start since assignments does not always have end dates. ETAS, Softhub, SignalReader and MCD-Hub assignments has this tool and its marked pink in illustration x. <br /> <br /> ===== File type filters =====<br /> There are three areas of checkboxes that are framed by a blue line and a sqaure checkbox labeled "Raw". The areas and the checkbox filter what type of files are shown. The framed areas stand for one filetype with their own subgroups. The areas are labeled with what file type they filter. When the square checkbox in the framed area is checked it will show you that areas file type. When their square checkbox is not checked the other checkboxes are disabled as they are the subgroups for that file type. The "Raw" checkbox is simpler as it only stands for if you want to show raw files and lacks subgroups. As with the other search functions in the WICE portal leaving all filters empty will result in everything being shown. The area labeled "Text" has 3 other checkboxes which will show you "Common", "Separate" and "All" text files. Note that not all text files have the subtype "Common" or "Seprate" and can only be shown in "All". The area labeled "MDF" has two other checkboxes which will you mdf files "With module names" or "Without module names" as a prefix for the signalnames. The area labeled "Vector" has two other checkboxes which will show you files refering to frames by "Frame ID" or "Frame name". MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have these tools but do not that Signalreader does not have the "Raw" button and can show all text files. These tools are marked blue in illustration x. <br /> <br /> ===== Compile by upload date =====<br /> The checkbox "Compile by portal upload date" will compile result files in a conteporary zip file if they were uploaded at the same time. When the files are compiled alot of functions that usually works on result files works differently or does not work as the zip file does not really exist or that its more than one file. As mentioned before you can not search for the compiled file since it does not exist. But when searching with this option turned on the compiled file will show up if one or more of the files it contains match the search criteria. This tools is automatically turned on since you are often looking after a specifik upload. MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have this tool and it is marked yellow in illustration x.<br /> ====Handling result files====<br /> When you have selected the result file(s) you want different buttons will be active depending on the file. The buttons are above the column bar and its where you download, view and convert result files. <br /> <br /> "Get file(s)", "Get all files" and "Get log files" will open a dialog to [[Downloading Files|download]] selected files, all files or that dates log files. In the dialog you will get the option to add a description, when downloading result files you can also add plate number and/or VIN to the file name. Note that downloading log files from multiple result files will download only log files 24 after the oldest result files so download logfiles from result files one result file at a time. <br /> <br /> "Save Headers" saves your current view of columns and files and saves it as default. This button has since been replaced by the two binoculars that are described in The Portal User View#The Search Fields Section. We therefore advice you to use the new and improved binoculars as save headers will be removed. <br /> <br /> "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> "View log files" will view log files from the selected file´s date. When viewing log files from multiple result files at the same time it will show you log files 24 hours after the oldest result file and not from both dates. you can always change the dates when viewing logfiles to narrow or widen the amount of files. When viewing log files you can read them by selecting a file and pressing "View file". There is also the option to "Get file(s)", "Save Headers", "Plot route" and "View file" who are all except "View file" described above. "View file" will open the log file in readable format in your current window. You can also filter logfiles like you filter result files by date, name and if they are downloaded or not. Note that when selecting to view log files from many files it will show log files from the oldest file's date and 24 hours forward. <br /> <br /> "View file" will open the file in a readable format in you current window. If the file is compiled by upload date or not readable this button will not be enabled. <br /> <br /> "Convert to text" will convert and download selected MDF file(s) to your computer. When doing this you will get a pop-up with the ability to add a description to your download. This is only availible for MDF files and this button can therefore only be found on assignments with MDF files. <br /> <br /> "Preview data" will give you a data preview window where you can preview the selected file(s) data. To read more about how to use this window and all its functions read [[Preview data]].</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Tasks_Tab&diff=788 Tasks Tab 2017-07-21T08:11:18Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>= Tasks Tab=</includeonly><br /> <div class="keywords"> Regexp, regex, reg ex, regual expression </div><br /> [[File:Illustration14.png|thumb|The search panel for finding tasks.]]<br /> In the task tab you can search for tasks, view their assignment, see the log files, see the result files, manage assignments, and much more.<br /> <br /> ==The Search Fields Section==<br /> The search field section consists of different columns where most have a field where you can insert search criteria to find assignments. As an example you have the label “Task ID:” which searches the field for task IDs matching your search criteria. When searching for tasks you can fill in one or more columns where the different search criteria will be treated with a logical AND between eachother.<br /> <br /> There are 21 different columns where some you can fill in a search criteria and some you can not. Below is a table with all the columns followed by a quick description. Note that the columns with a star is the one where you can put in search criteria to filter results.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> !Task ID*<br /> |The nummeric Task ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Assignmnet*<br /> |The assignment's name.<br /> |-<br /> !Type*<br /> |Different options for assignment types where one or more can be selected.<br /> |-<br /> !WCU ID*<br /> |The WCU's ID and also the column where you see the WCU's label.<br /> |-<br /> !Upload size<br /> |The upload size of all the assignment's uploads given in Kbytes.<br /> |-<br /> !Plate number*<br /> |The car's plate number.<br /> |-<br /> !Status*<br /> |Different options for assignment statuses where one or more can be selected.<br /> |-<br /> !Last log<br /> |When the last log file was transferred to the portal.<br /> |-<br /> !Last upload<br /> |Date of the assignments's last upload.<br /> |-<br /> !VIN*<br /> |The car's VIN ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Proto number*<br /> |The proto number.<br /> |-<br /> !Project*<br /> |The project ID.<br /> |-<br /> !TSU*<br /> |The TSU ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Car comment*<br /> |The car's comment/description.<br /> |-<br /> !Series*<br /> |The series attribut.<br /> |-<br /> !Message*<br /> |The assignment's status message.<br /> |-<br /> !WCU name*<br /> |The name of the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> !Task owner<br /> |The current owner of the task.<br /> |-<br /> !Expire date<br /> |The date the assignment will expire.<br /> |-<br /> !Task creator<br /> |The original creator of the task.<br /> |-<br /> !Creation date<br /> |The creation date of the assignment.<br /> |}<br /> In every collumn you can use regular expressions for your searches. To designate an "all" search you enter a period (".") for that particular field or leave it empty if another field is already filled. All searches are treated with the letters as wild-cards. An example is if you intend to search for tasks containing the word “bear” simply enter “bear” in the text field. Now, if there are tasks with the names “bear”, “polar bear”and “unbearable” all of these will match as they contain the word “bear” somewhere.<br /> <br /> To search for a range of WCUs, assume the WCUs MM-810:1 – MM-823:1, you enter the query 81[0-9]|82[0-3]. This is a regular expression where the first expression, 81[0-9], means that we want our search to start with an '8' followed by a '1' and then any digit in range 0-9. The second part, 82[0-3], means an '8' followed by a '2' and then any digit in range 0-3. The two expressions are combined with a pipe characater ("|") which means logical OR. In other words we are looking for range 810-819 OR 820-823.<br /> <br /> '''Note!''' If your WCU/resource group you are searching for has special characters (like '(' or '/') in its name you may need to escape these characters in order to get the desired result. Escape means putting a '\' before the special character. For example if you want to enter (and search for) the resource group name 'ABC(Alpha_Bravo_Charlie)' you need to write 'ABC\(Alpha\_Bravo\_Charlie\)'. Another example is when you want to list a WCU that contains "07-51" in its name. In this case you need to type "07\-51", otherwise the "-" character will make the searcher to search for a range of numbers.<br /> <br /> For more info how to use regular expressions, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression#Standards Regular Expressions]<br /> <br /> When you are filling in search criteria you can see in the top right corner how WICE says "Rows found:". That tell you how many assignments your search will find so you know if you need to narrow or broaden your search.<br /> <br /> In the bottom right corner you have two binoculars. With these you can save and load your search criterias and shown columns for future uses. You can also set a view of criteria and columns as your default by hovering over the view you want and then pressing the pin button. There is also two magnifying glasses that can save and load your search results so even if their information change and can not be found with the same search criteria you can still find them. You can also pair a search with a view by going to your searches and then on the search click the binocular button and select which view you want to pair it with. You can also pair them going to your searches and press "Select search views" where you get a window with the option to pair your searches with views.<br /> <br /> If you are using an older version than 2.45.0 you have 4 bars with calanders to the right of them. This is a function to search assignments by date of creation and last update. This function has been removed in 2.45.0 and does not work like intended in 2.44.8.<br /> <br /> In 2.45.0 and forward there will at the top be a option to search assignments after their label. By selecting multiple labels you can search for more than one at the same time.<br /> <br /> == The Result Section ==<br /> The assignments are fetched when you press the "Search" button in the tasks tab. Here we will go through the bottom part of task tab and the options for your previous search.<br /> ===Assignment Options===<br /> You can right-click one or many assignments to get a window with a range of options described below:<br /> * "Show task description" will show you the description of the task that the assignment you right-clicked on belongs <br /> * "Go to Vehicles Panel" will take you to the vehicles tab. When you are in the vehicles tab the car(s) you selected will be shown in the vehicles tab.<br /> * "Go to Search Panel" will take you to the search tab. When you are in the search tab the WCU(s) you selected will be selected in the search tab.<br /> * "Get/Show assignment" will give you a small pop-up with some assignment information and a "Download assignment" button if a download is possible. If you choose to press "Download assignment" the assignment file will be downloaded to your computer in its original format.<br /> * "Edit task" will give you the option to edit ownership and expiration date of the task. It will also show you the WCU(s) the task is running on. <br /> * "Show car info" and "Show WCU info" will give you a pop-up showing you available info of the assignment car and WCU. Depending on which car/WCU you choose there will be different information available since cars/WCUs can lack information. <br /> * "Show message" will show you the assignment's status message. <br /> * "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> * "Event subscription" is an option where you choose to subscibe to a car, a WCU or an assignment. When hovering above "Event subscription" you will see three options, "Connect", "Assignment status" and "Result upload". With the option "Connect " you can subscribe to the selected car(s) or WCU(s) and get notified when their connection status changes. "Assignment status" and "Result upload" subscribes you to selected assignment(s) and gets you notified about status changes and when results are uploaded. You will se events when clicking on the bell symbol at the top which gets a red dot when theres new events from your subscriptions.<br /> <br /> ===Column Options===<br /> The result section have alot of ways to sort, view and handle the result with the columns. When right-clicking a column you will get a window with different options for the column. <br /> * "Sort Ascending" and "Sort Descending" will sort the assignments in ascending or descending order after the column's attribute.<br /> * "Configure Sort" where you can add more levels of sorting so that it sorts for more than one thing in different priority. For example can you sort after task ID ascending and then sort after WCU ID descending. When a column has a sorting prefrens the option "Clear Sort" will appear which clears your sorting prefrences for that column. <br /> * "Columns" opens a window where you can select which columns you want to have shown and which you want to have hidden by checking their boxes or unchecking them. If you remove a column with a filled search criteria that criteria will still matter when you make a new search. Also when you make the new search the column will reappear.<br /> * "Group by" group together the assignments that share the column's attribute value. When they are grouped there will be the option "Ungroup" that ungroups them. <br /> * "Freeze" moves the column to the left corner and freezes it in position so it can be rearranged. If there is alraedy a frozen column till will move next to it as they go from left to right in chronological order. The "freeze" then becomes "Unfreeze" which revertes the freeze. <br /> * "Export to excel" will export the columns and results into an excel file that will get downloaded. <br /> * "Clear all fields" will clear all columns of their criteria. <br /> * "Get help for this column" should take you here.<br /> <br /> ===Get result files===<br /> When selecting a file you can view the result files by pressing "Get Result Files" if there are available result files. That will create a window where you can search, view and download result files. It is also possible to view result files from multiple assignments at the same time by selecting many assignments of the same type (Only possible for signalreader and MCD-Hub).<br /> ====Searching result files====<br /> The window will look different depending on what kind of assignment you selected watching. The different windows all share alot of tools and have the same concept, to search and filter files. In illustration x you can see how a MCD-Hub result window looks. This is a great example as this window contains all different tools while all the others can be seen as an MCD-Hub window that does not need and therefore lacks some of the tools. There are some tools that all have and just like when creating a task the common ones are at the top. Below is a description of all tools followed by which assignment window that has them:<br /> <br /> ===== General search functions =====<br /> [[File:Get Result files.png|thumb|400x400px|illustration 6: The-MCD-Hub result file window.]]<br /> At the top there are two boxes, labeled "Description" and "Filename", where you can search for files based on their description and filename. The "Description" box is disabled so that you can not type in it. When searching after filename it will search after the not compiled files and not the compiled files. Below those are two other boxes with two checkboxes. The boxes are labeled "From" and "To" and contain dates that can be changed by pressing the calender next to the box. The files are filtered so only files between those two dates are shown. The checkboxes are labeled "Measurement Date" and "Upload to Portal" and only one of them can be checked. The checkboxes tell if the files will be filtered by measurement or upload date. There is also a checkbox labeled "Hide downloaded files" which will filter out already downloaded files but this button is disabled if the checkbox "Compline by portal update date" is checked. These tools are the same for all type of assignments and can be seen as marked green in illustration 6. <br /> <br /> ===== GPX inclusion =====<br /> The checkbox "Include GPX" enables gpx files to be downloaded when downloading result files. That means each downloaded result file will have a corresponding gpx file containing the route of the car when the assignment was executed. Note that the en date for the route is 24 hours after the start since assignments does not always have end dates. ETAS, Softhub, SignalReader and MCD-Hub assignments has this tool and its marked pink in illustration x. <br /> <br /> ===== File type filters =====<br /> There are three areas of checkboxes that are framed by a blue line and a sqaure checkbox labeled "Raw". The areas and the checkbox filter what type of files are shown. The framed areas stand for one filetype with their own subgroups. The areas are labeled with what file type they filter. When the square checkbox in the framed area is checked it will show you that areas file type. When their square checkbox is not checked the other checkboxes are disabled as they are the subgroups for that file type. The "Raw" checkbox is simpler as it only stands for if you want to show raw files and lacks subgroups. As with the other search functions in the WICE portal leaving all filters empty will result in everything being shown. The area labeled "Text" has 3 other checkboxes which will show you "Common", "Separate" and "All" text files. Note that not all text files have the subtype "Common" or "Seprate" and can only be shown in "All". The area labeled "MDF" has two other checkboxes which will you mdf files "With module names" or "Without module names" as a prefix for the signalnames. The area labeled "Vector" has two other checkboxes which will show you files refering to frames by "Frame ID" or "Frame name". MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have these tools but do not that Signalreader does not have the "Raw" button and can show all text files. These tools are marked blue in illustration x. <br /> <br /> ===== Compile by upload date =====<br /> The checkbox "Compile by portal upload date" will compile result files in a conteporary zip file if they were uploaded at the same time. When the files are compiled alot of functions that usually works on result files works differently or does not work as the zip file does not really exist or that its more than one file. As mentioned before you can not search for the compiled file since it does not exist. But when searching with this option turned on the compiled file will show up if one or more of the files it contains match the search criteria. This tools is automatically turned on since you are often looking after a specifik upload. MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have this tool and it is marked yellow in illustration x.<br /> ====Handling result files====<br /> When you have selected the result file(s) you want different buttons will be active depending on the file. The buttons are above the column bar and its where you download, view and convert result files. <br /> <br /> "Get file(s)", "Get all files" and "Get log files" will open a dialog to [[Downloading Files|download]] selected files, all files or that dates log files. Note that downloading log files from multiple result files will download only log files 24 after the oldest result files so download logfiles from result files one result file at a time. <br /> <br /> "Save Headers" saves your current view of columns and files and saves it as default. This button has since been replaced by the two binoculars that are described in The Portal User View#The Search Fields Section. We therefore advice you to use the new and improved binoculars as save headers will be removed. <br /> <br /> "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> "View log files" will view log files from the selected file´s date. When viewing log files from multiple result files at the same time it will show you log files 24 hours after the oldest result file and not from both dates. you can always change the dates when viewing logfiles to narrow or widen the amount of files. When viewing log files you can read them by selecting a file and pressing "View file". There is also the option to "Get file(s)", "Save Headers", "Plot route" and "View file" who are all except "View file" described above. "View file" will open the log file in readable format in your current window. You can also filter logfiles like you filter result files by date, name and if they are downloaded or not. Note that when selecting to view log files from many files it will show log files from the oldest file's date and 24 hours forward. <br /> <br /> "View file" will open the file in a readable format in you current window. If the file is compiled by upload date or not readable this button will not be enabled. <br /> <br /> "Convert to text" will convert and download selected MDF file(s) to your computer. When doing this you will get a pop-up with the ability to add a description to your download. This is only availible for MDF files and this button can therefore only be found on assignments with MDF files. <br /> <br /> "Preview data" will give you a data preview window where you can preview the selected file(s) data. To read more about how to use this window and all its functions read [[Preview data]].</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Creating_a_Task&diff=787 Creating a Task 2017-07-20T15:07:03Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>= Creating a Task=</includeonly><br /> You create a new task by pressing the "New Task" button on the bottom of the screen. This will open a window with one tab for each assignment. Here we will go through how to create a task with all nine kinds of assignments. Note that step 3-7 on MCD-Hub is identical on all assignments so it will not be described to avoid this being repetitive.[[File:Illustration5.png|illustration 1: MCD-Hub|400x400px|thumb|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration5.png]]<br /> ===MCD-Hub===<br /> MCD-Hub assignments are used to collect data using the MCD-Hub flight recorder. This assignment tab has seven areas (as shown in illustration 1) with one function each that is used accordingly:<br /> <br /> 1. Selecting which MCD-Hub assignment file to use. Press "Bläddra"/"Browse" to bring up the file selection where you select the .hub file to use.<br /> <br /> 2. Choose which formats the MCD-Hub result files should be converted to when result files are uploaded to the portal from a WCU. <br /> <br /> 3. Write a descriptive text for the assignment. (optional)<br /> <br /> 4. Choose if you want to be notified by email if the assignment fails to start. if you have not filled in an email adress you will get oppurtunity when pressing ok. (optional)<br /> <br /> 5. Assign owner and the period of validity to the assignment. This is filled automatically and is optionally changed.<br /> <br /> 6. This option is under construction, do not use except for special cases.<br /> <br /> 7. Start searching and selecting a WCU by pressing add resources at the bottom left of the screen. There you will get a pop up with 2 boxes, the upper one for searching cars and the bottom one for selected cars. In the top one you can search WCU units with ten different parameters by writing a value and pressing search or ENTER. to select a WCU you drag it from the top to the bottom box so that it appears in the bottom one.<br /> <br /> After you press Ok and make the transfer there will be a pop-up telling you "Transfer ok!" if the transfer and checks went well, otherwise there will be a pop-up showing you an error cause.<br /> ===CAN-recorder===<br /> [[File:Illustration6.png|thumb|Illustration 2: Canrecorder|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration6.png]]Canrecorder is a measurement module that allows CAN frames to be captured and logged. This assignment has 4 functions described in illustration 2 and below:<br /> <br /> 1. Turning on or off CAN frame pass through filter. If you choose to have the filter on you must specify which CAN bus or CAN buses you wish to record. If you do not have the filter on you should not specify a CAN bus.<br /> <br /> 2. Choose if you want to record with the high speed CAN bus and/or the low speed can bus.<br /> <br /> 3. Specify which CAN buses you want to record by entering their ID and then pressing enter. This should only be done if the CAN frame passthrough filter is turned on.<br /> <br /> 4. Select how much time to record before and after the trigger.<br /> ===IDC===<br /> Internal Diagnostic Client (IDC) is a measurement module that allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent and responses recorded. The sequence of diagnostic requests are uploaded to the portal as a text file (usually ending with ".seq").<br /> <br /> When assigning an IDC assignment it is identical to a MCD-Hub assignment except the file you select must be a .seq file and you can not choose conversion format.<br /> ===SoH===<br /> [[File:Illustration7.png|353x353px|Illustration 3: SoH tab|thumb|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration7.png]]The State of Health (SoH) assignment collects specific status information from vechiles. You select which information you want the assignment to collect by filling in one or more of the six boxes shown in illustration 3. In order for SoH data to be correctly interpreted, relevant description files (SDDB/GDS) for the vehicles executing the SoH assignment must have been defined. To add a SDDB/GDS file to a vehicle, see [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog]].The six different options are:<br /> *Mileage<br /> *Voltage<br /> *Read ECU software numbers<br /> *Read ECU DTC:s<br /> *Read OBD-II PIDs<br /> *App Diagnotstic Db Part Num<br /> ===Signal Reader===<br /> [[File:Illustration8.png|thumb|Illustration 4: Signal reader assignment.|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration8.png]]Signal Reader is a measurement module that allows monitoring and logging of CAN-bus signals, as well as diagnostics data. Signal Reader performs more or less the same kind of measurements as the MCD-Hub but it has other functions at its disposal. Those other functions are described below and shown in illustration 4:<br /> <br /> 1. You select the file you want. It must be a .haf file which is a text version of .hub a file.<br /> <br /> 2. When you have selected a file and WCU unit(s) the buses defined in the file and the WCU will be mapped but if they can not it will come a pop-up. In the pop-up window you will have to map the different buses to eachother manually. You can always map the buses manually by selecting "Manual mapping" and then pressing mappings at the top. Read more about this in [[I/O configurations]] and [[Mappings]].<br /> <br /> 3. With a Signal Reader assignment you can follow WCU signals live by selecting "Monitor signals". When selected it will come up two boxes under the task description. In the left one you search for signals and drag them over to the right one where the monitored signals are. You can later se the monitored signals through the vehicles tab. It is also possible to copy the signals text in the bottom right corner of the right box. Next to the copy text button you can also paste signals as text where the pasted signal names will be matched against the list of unselected signals<br /> <br /> 4. You can choose if you want the signals to have their source modules names as a prefix.<br /> ===SWDL===<br /> A Software Download (SWDL) task updates the ECU software in one or more ECUs in one or more vehicles. A number of Versatile Binary Format (VBF) files containing the ECU software need to be supplied, along with PIN codes to allow security access to re-program the ECUs.<br /> ===ETAS===<br /> Through an ETAS task, an ETAS ES720 Drive Recorder system can be conillustrationed, and measurement data offloaded, and accessed through the WICE Portal.<br /> <br /> When assigning an ETAS assignment it is identical to a MCD-Hub assignment except the file you select must be a .exp file and you can not choose conversion format.<br /> ===SoftHub===<br /> The SoftHub is a more recent version of the MCD-Hub measurement system, and a SoftHub task is created much in the same way an MCD-Hub task is.<br /> <br /> When assigning an SoftHub assignment it is identical to a MCD-Hub assignment except the file you select must be a .shub file.<br /> ===Blue piraT===<br /> The blue PiraT is a measurement system from Telemotive AG that can be conillustrationd with measurement set-ups, and data accessed through the WICE Portal. Note that to use the blue PiraT module, the WCUs to be used need to be preconillustrationd with a special software package. Contact Alkit Communications in order to set this up.</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Roles_and_permissions&diff=786 Roles and permissions 2017-07-20T13:15:02Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>====Roles and permissions====</includeonly><br /> In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> [[File:Edit roles and permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of three tables. The top left table holds a list of the roles, the top right holds the user(s) for the selected role and the bottom one hold the selected role's permissions. Their size is adjustable and you can minimize them by clicking on the line between them.<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “Add role” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the red button next to it. When making a role you add a description and unique name. To edit an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top left table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions and the upper right table shows which users have that role. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be a list of resources and resource groups that the permission applies to.<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> ====== Creating and editing roles and permissions ======<br /> [[File:Add permission.png|thumb|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> To create a new permission press the “Add permission” button. It opens the following interaction depicted in illustration 52.<br /> [[File:Editing permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 53: Editing assignment permissions]]<br /> # Selecting Which kind of permission you want. there are 8 different permissions 7 to give permissions to WCUs and one to give permission to all assignments(the assignment permission can not be modified).The different assignments for WCUs are:<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Configuration.''' The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type. Now the permission is actually created but it can be changed to your likings. Illustration 53 shows the dialog Where you edit the permission.<br /> # Choosing if the permission should be a read and/or write permission. One of these have to be selected or you will not be able to save changes.<br /> # Selecting which resources that apply to the permission. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 53. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group. To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow. There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> # Set which kind of assignments the permission applies to. It is automatically set to have all selected but you can unselect all and selecting other assignments. This option is only availible on the assignment, monitor and module permission.<br /> When you are done press "Save changes" or "Reset changes" if you want to revert the changes. You can always edit the permission by selecting it getting the same dialog and change it except that you can not change what type of assignment it is.<br /> <br /> ====== Changing a users roles and permissions ======<br /> You can change a users roles under in the edit user dialog if you press the button "Edit user roles". The edit user dialog then gets extended as two boxes appear, a left one with available roles and a right one with current roles. In the left one you can search the role(s) you want and drag them to the right box or press the button pointing right. With the two buttons at the bottom corner(the paper and clipboard ones) you can copy the names of the roles and also insert the names of roles to add them.<br /> <br /> You can also change a users permission to view tasks in the tasks tab. By right-clicking the permission(s) you want to change permissions one and going to "Permission" you will get the options "Show who can see assignment" and "Add who can see assignment". "Show who can see assignment" will open a window with a left and a right box where the left contains users without permission to view the assignment and the right conatins users who have permission. By moving users from the left to right and vice versa you can give or remove someones permission. You can also press the clibboard the the right bottom to copy the users who have permissions or add users by writing their name within parentheses. Users in the right box can be unselectable and that is if they have a role giving them the permission to view that assignment the only way to remove that is to remove that role from them. "Add who can see assignment" works the same way as "Show who can see assignment" except that the right box does not show users with permission so you can not remove permissions, this si so that with add you can add permissions for many assignments at the same time as the show can not show users from many assignments.<br /> [[File:Copy user assignment permissions.png|thumb|300x300px|Illustration 54: Copy user assignment permissions dialog]]<br /> You can also edit a users role by searching for user(s) and right clicking on them to get a window with different options. There are five different options where the three first can be used on multiple users at the same time while the bottom two can not.<br /> * "Add user assignment permissions to this user" will open the dialog shown in illustration 54. With this button you take a users assignment permissions and add them to the selected user(s). You do this by searching and selecting a user and then pressing "OK".<br /> * "Replace user assignment permissions with user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button i much like the one before except that instead of adding permissions to the current this replaces the permissions that the selected user(s) have. Here you also search the user whose permissions you want to replace the select them and press "OK".<br /> * "Copy user roles to this user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button instead of replacing permissions replace selected user(s) roles with the roles of a user who you chose. Search the user whose roles you want to copy for replacement and press "OK".[[File:Give permission on car.png|thumb|Illustration 55: Give permission on car dialog]]<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on Car" is quite self explanatory and is to give assignment permission on one or many cars. The dialog will look like illustration 55. In the left box you select cars and move them to the right to give permission on them, you can also as you see below the left box select a file with cars to easily select a set of cars. Then you select which types of assignments it should give permission to (leaving this empty will not give any permissions). You can also check the checkbox "Reset user permission" to replace the roles of the selected user instead of adding new to the current ones.<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on WCU" is identical to the previous button except that it applies to WCUs instead of Cars.<br /> {{DEFAULTSORT:Rolas and Permissions}}</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Roles_and_permissions&diff=785 Roles and permissions 2017-07-20T13:14:51Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>====Roles and permissions====</includeonly><br /> In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> [[File:Edit roles and permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of three tables. The top left table holds a list of the roles, the top right holds the user(s) for the selected role and the bottom one hold the selected role's permissions. Their size is adjustable and you can minimize them by clicking on the line between them.<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “Add role” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the red button next to it. When making a role you add a description and unique name. To edit an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top left table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions and the upper right table shows which users have that role. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be a list of resources and resource groups that the permission applies to.<br /> <br /> <br clear="all"><br /> ====== Creating and editing roles and permissions ======<br /> [[File:Add permission.png|thumb|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> To create a new permission press the “Add permission” button. It opens the following interaction depicted in illustration 52.<br /> [[File:Editing permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 53: Editing assignment permissions]]<br /> # Selecting Which kind of permission you want. there are 8 different permissions 7 to give permissions to WCUs and one to give permission to all assignments(the assignment permission can not be modified).The different assignments for WCUs are:<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Configuration.''' The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type. Now the permission is actually created but it can be changed to your likings. Illustration 53 shows the dialog Where you edit the permission.<br /> # Choosing if the permission should be a read and/or write permission. One of these have to be selected or you will not be able to save changes.<br /> # Selecting which resources that apply to the permission. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 53. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group. To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow. There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> # Set which kind of assignments the permission applies to. It is automatically set to have all selected but you can unselect all and selecting other assignments. This option is only availible on the assignment, monitor and module permission.<br /> When you are done press "Save changes" or "Reset changes" if you want to revert the changes. You can always edit the permission by selecting it getting the same dialog and change it except that you can not change what type of assignment it is.<br /> <br /> ====== Changing a users roles and permissions ======<br /> You can change a users roles under in the edit user dialog if you press the button "Edit user roles". The edit user dialog then gets extended as two boxes appear, a left one with available roles and a right one with current roles. In the left one you can search the role(s) you want and drag them to the right box or press the button pointing right. With the two buttons at the bottom corner(the paper and clipboard ones) you can copy the names of the roles and also insert the names of roles to add them.<br /> <br /> You can also change a users permission to view tasks in the tasks tab. By right-clicking the permission(s) you want to change permissions one and going to "Permission" you will get the options "Show who can see assignment" and "Add who can see assignment". "Show who can see assignment" will open a window with a left and a right box where the left contains users without permission to view the assignment and the right conatins users who have permission. By moving users from the left to right and vice versa you can give or remove someones permission. You can also press the clibboard the the right bottom to copy the users who have permissions or add users by writing their name within parentheses. Users in the right box can be unselectable and that is if they have a role giving them the permission to view that assignment the only way to remove that is to remove that role from them. "Add who can see assignment" works the same way as "Show who can see assignment" except that the right box does not show users with permission so you can not remove permissions, this si so that with add you can add permissions for many assignments at the same time as the show can not show users from many assignments.<br /> [[File:Copy user assignment permissions.png|thumb|300x300px|Illustration 54: Copy user assignment permissions dialog]]<br /> You can also edit a users role by searching for user(s) and right clicking on them to get a window with different options. There are five different options where the three first can be used on multiple users at the same time while the bottom two can not.<br /> * "Add user assignment permissions to this user" will open the dialog shown in illustration 54. With this button you take a users assignment permissions and add them to the selected user(s). You do this by searching and selecting a user and then pressing "OK".<br /> * "Replace user assignment permissions with user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button i much like the one before except that instead of adding permissions to the current this replaces the permissions that the selected user(s) have. Here you also search the user whose permissions you want to replace the select them and press "OK".<br /> * "Copy user roles to this user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button instead of replacing permissions replace selected user(s) roles with the roles of a user who you chose. Search the user whose roles you want to copy for replacement and press "OK".[[File:Give permission on car.png|thumb|Illustration 55: Give permission on car dialog]]<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on Car" is quite self explanatory and is to give assignment permission on one or many cars. The dialog will look like illustration 55. In the left box you select cars and move them to the right to give permission on them, you can also as you see below the left box select a file with cars to easily select a set of cars. Then you select which types of assignments it should give permission to (leaving this empty will not give any permissions). You can also check the checkbox "Reset user permission" to replace the roles of the selected user instead of adding new to the current ones.<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on WCU" is identical to the previous button except that it applies to WCUs instead of Cars.<br /> {{DEFAULTSORT:Rolas and Permissions}}</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Roles_and_permissions&diff=784 Roles and permissions 2017-07-20T13:06:17Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: /* Creating and editing roles and permissions */</p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>====Roles and permissions====</includeonly><br /> In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> [[File:Edit roles and permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of three tables. The top left table holds a list of the roles, the top right holds the user(s) for the selected role and the bottom one hold the selected role's permissions. Their size is adjustable and you can minimize them by clicking on the line between them.<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “Add role” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the red button next to it. When making a role you add a description and unique name. To edit an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top left table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions and the upper right table shows which users have that role. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be a list of resources and resource groups that the permission applies to.<br /> <br /> ====== Creating and editing roles and permissions ======<br /> [[File:Add permission.png|thumb|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> To create a new permission press the “Add permission” button. It opens the following interaction depicted in illustration 52.<br /> [[File:Editing permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 53: Editing assignment permissions]]<br /> # Selecting Which kind of permission you want. there are 8 different permissions 7 to give permissions to WCUs and one to give permission to all assignments(the assignment permission can not be modified).The different assignments for WCUs are:<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Configuration.''' The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type. Now the permission is actually created but it can be changed to your likings. Illustration 53 shows the dialog Where you edit the permission.<br /> # Choosing if the permission should be a read and/or write permission. One of these have to be selected or you will not be able to save changes.<br /> # Selecting which resources that apply to the permission. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 53. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group. To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow. There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> # Set which kind of assignments the permission applies to. It is automatically set to have all selected but you can unselect all and selecting other assignments. This option is only availible on the assignment, monitor and module permission.<br /> When you are done press "Save changes" or "Reset changes" if you want to revert the changes. You can always edit the permission by selecting it getting the same dialog and change it except that you can not change what type of assignment it is.<br /> <br /> ====== Changing a users roles and permissions ======<br /> You can change a users roles under in the edit user dialog if you press the button "Edit user roles". The edit user dialog then gets extended as two boxes appear, a left one with available roles and a right one with current roles. In the left one you can search the role(s) you want and drag them to the right box or press the button pointing right. With the two buttons at the bottom corner(the paper and clipboard ones) you can copy the names of the roles and also insert the names of roles to add them.<br /> <br /> You can also change a users permission to view tasks in the tasks tab. By right-clicking the permission(s) you want to change permissions one and going to "Permission" you will get the options "Show who can see assignment" and "Add who can see assignment". "Show who can see assignment" will open a window with a left and a right box where the left contains users without permission to view the assignment and the right conatins users who have permission. By moving users from the left to right and vice versa you can give or remove someones permission. You can also press the clibboard the the right bottom to copy the users who have permissions or add users by writing their name within parentheses. Users in the right box can be unselectable and that is if they have a role giving them the permission to view that assignment the only way to remove that is to remove that role from them. "Add who can see assignment" works the same way as "Show who can see assignment" except that the right box does not show users with permission so you can not remove permissions, this si so that with add you can add permissions for many assignments at the same time as the show can not show users from many assignments.<br /> [[File:Copy user assignment permissions.png|thumb|300x300px|Illustration 54: Copy user assignment permissions dialog]]<br /> You can also edit a users role by searching for user(s) and right clicking on them to get a window with different options. There are five different options where the three first can be used on multiple users at the same time while the bottom two can not.<br /> * "Add user assignment permissions to this user" will open the dialog shown in illustration 54. With this button you take a users assignment permissions and add them to the selected user(s). You do this by searching and selecting a user and then pressing "OK".<br /> * "Replace user assignment permissions with user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button i much like the one before except that instead of adding permissions to the current this replaces the permissions that the selected user(s) have. Here you also search the user whose permissions you want to replace the select them and press "OK".<br /> * "Copy user roles to this user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button instead of replacing permissions replace selected user(s) roles with the roles of a user who you chose. Search the user whose roles you want to copy for replacement and press "OK".[[File:Give permission on car.png|thumb|Illustration 55: Give permission on car dialog]]<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on Car" is quite self explanatory and is to give assignment permission on one or many cars. The dialog will look like illustration 55. In the left box you select cars and move them to the right to give permission on them, you can also as you see below the left box select a file with cars to easily select a set of cars. Then you select which types of assignments it should give permission to (leaving this empty will not give any permissions). You can also check the checkbox "Reset user permission" to replace the roles of the selected user instead of adding new to the current ones.<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on WCU" is identical to the previous button except that it applies to WCUs instead of Cars.<br /> {{DEFAULTSORT:Rolas and Permissions}}</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&diff=783 The Portal Administrator View 2017-07-20T13:04:52Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>An administrator can do everything a user can do and more. In addition to the user, an administrator can create and modify users and stop assignments for any task. <br /> These new functions will be explained in the next 3 chapters.<br /> <br /> We will start with the search tab where two more buttons are visible. Next is the vehicles tab.<br /> Lastly is the administration tab with 5 sub tabs consisting of: the connect tab, the archives tab the<br /> GDS/SDDB files tab, the resource groups tab and the users tab.<br /> <br /> ==The Search Tab==<br /> [[File:Admin stop assigment.png|thumb|200x200px|Illustration 32a: Stop running assignment]]<br /> [[File:Admin force stop assignment.png|thumb|200x200px|Illustration 32b: Force stop assignment]]<br /> In addition to the functionality for an ordinary user, an administrator have one more button present. An administrator can send a force stop command to any WCU. <br /> <br /> Illustration 32a shows the "Stop assigment" button. This button is the same as for the ordinary user and is used to stop a running assignment. When a running assignment is stopped, it changes state to "Stop pending". This means that the portal is waiting for a stop message from the WCU before the state is changed to "Stopped" in the portal view. The administrator view exclusive "Force Stop Assignment" button, which can be seen in illustration 32b, forces a "Stop pending" assignment into "Stopped" state without waiting for the stop signal from the WCU. <br /> <br /> Also, the administrator can search and view any user's task.<br /> <br /> ==The Vehicles Tab==<br /> An administrator can do quite a many things in this view. Illustration 33 shows an example of this view. The table header along with the buttons “Edit Description” and “Get Log Files” are explained in the page for '''[[Vehicles]]'''. <br /> <br /> At the bottom you have a set of buttons to aid in handling the WCUs. To add a new WCU to the portal, the “New” buttons opens up a dialog for that. The “Get Log Files” button fetches log files for the selected WCU from the portal.<br /> <br /> [[File:42vehiclestab.png|none|left|frame|Illustration 33: The administrator's view in the WCUs tab.]]<br /> <br /> ===The New WCU Dialog===<br /> [[File:Illustration34.png|frame|Illustration 34: The Add New WCU Dialog.]]<br /> There are two ways that a WCU can enter the portal. The first is if you click the “New WCU” button and the second is the first time a WCU connects to the portal it registers itself. Ideally you will never have to add a WCU to the portal but just as a safety step you have the opportunity to add it yourself. When clicking the “New WCU” button the dialog in Illustration 34 opens up. You must enter the ID of the WCU as this is a unique identifier and you will be notified if the ID is already present on the portal. The description is optional but may be handy to remember which WCU it is.<br /> <br /> ===Edit the WCU Configuration===<br /> [[File:Wcu config1.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Modules.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config2.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Connection.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config3.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: WCU.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config4.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Power management.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu_config_wake_on_can.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Wake On CAN]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config5.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Upload.]]<br /> You can edit the configuration of the WCU from the portal. Simply click on '''Edit Configuration''' to open up the window in "Illustration: WCU Configuration: Modules". The WCU configuration window is divided into five tabs where each tab is described below. <br /> <br /> ====Modules====<br /> The set of check boxes for the different modules that are present is nine and are at the top. Check or uncheck these to tell the WCU if they are present or not. Doing so will speed up the boot process.<br /> <br /> To edit "Car type", click on the field where the car type is the displayed to open the "Edit car" dialog. This dialog is described in section [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog]]<br /> <br /> The last three check boxes, "Run IDC at boot", "Run IDC at ignition off" and "Enable VIN reader" is self-explanatory.<br /> <br /> ====Connection====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Connection" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Internet Service Provider (ISP)<br /> | Which ISP to use when multiple SIM cards are installed<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | WICE portal address<br /> | The server that the WCU should use for fetching new assignments etc.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | DRO Server<br /> | The server to connect to when doing a DRO.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> ====WCU====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: WCU" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Unit ID:<br /> | The ID cannot be changed from the portal. It can only be changed by logging on to the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Platform type:<br /> | The WCU platform type.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Platform subtype:<br /> | The WCU platform subtype.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | WCU software version:<br /> | This is the currenly used WCU software version.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Preferred WCU software:<br /> | This is the new preferred WCU software version to be installed.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Perform reset on update:<br /> | Removes all data on the WCU when installing a new WCU software.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | MX4 firmware version:<br /> | The currently used MX4 firmware version.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Preferred MX4 firmware:<br /> | The new preferred MX4 firmware.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> From version 2.40 of the WCU software, all WCUs report its platform type. The platform type determines, among other things, the number of available CAN buses in the IO tab. (see [[I/O configurations]]) Since a resource group is a collection of WCUs it has no platform type of its own to report. From version 2.41 of the portal the user has the option to set a fictive platform type for a resource group. This is also a prerequisite to also set the [[I/O configurations]] for a resource group. The platform type (and eventual subtype) is set in the WCU tab. If the resource group has members with other platform type(s) than the type that is about to be set, the user will get a warning.<br /> <br /> If the platform type of the resource group differs from the platform type of its members the I/O tab will be disabled. This is also the case when the platform type of the resource group and one member is the same but another member has another platform type.<br /> <br /> From version 2.42 it is possible to update the WCU root password. To update the password, write the new password in "Set root password" and save the configuration.<br /> <br /> ====Power Management====<br /> [[File:Periodic wake up time.png|thumb|frame|Illustration: Perodic wake-up]]<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Power management " and the tab content is described below.<br /> <br /> “Power mode” has two settings, Sleep and cut-off. In cut-off the MCD-Hub is not powered up on boot, nor is the WCU woken up at regular intervals to report battery voltage, GPS position etc.<br /> <br /> In the other mode, sleep, some more settings are visible as shown in "Illustration: Wake On Can". <br /> You can select the WCU to remain unpowered by selecting "External cut-off". In addition, you may enable the WCus wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time”. The “Periodic run-time” determines how long time the WCU should be awake before going back to sleep. The “Periodic wake-up time” indicates the time for each new wake up cycle.<br /> <br /> From version 2.43 it is also possible to set power mode to "deep sleep" for WCUs running on platform MX4 T20/T30 and MX4 V61. The configuration is the same as for mode "sleep".<br /> <br /> '''Example: ''' <br /> A periodic run-time of 600 seconds means that the WCU will be alive for 600 seconds (10 minutes). A periodic wake-up time of 3600 seconds means that the WCU will start a new run-time (600 seconds in this case) every new hour. (3600 seconds = 60 min). The sleep time in each cycle is, for the general case, the wake-up time minus the run-time and in this example 3600 minus 600 = 3000 seconds (50 min).<br /> This example is illustrated in illustration "Perodic wake-up.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ====Upload====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Upload" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Mobile upload limit<br /> | Defines the maximum data size that should be transferred via the mobile network. If the data size is larger than that the WCU will wait until a connection to a local network can be established. The size is in Mbytes.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Post run grace timeout<br /> | The number of seconds to wait before communicating with the MCD-Hub and portal, if the ignition is turned off.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload timeout<br /> | The maximum number of seconds the WCU should upload data before stopping.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Erase error code<br /> | If turned on the error codes in the car will be reset.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload data at boot<br /> | Uploads data when the WCU boots up<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload data at ignition off<br /> | Uploads data when the car is turned off<br /> |}<br /> <gallery widths="150px" mode="nolines"><br /> File:Wcu config1.png|Illustration: Modules.<br /> File:Wcu config2.png|Illustration: Connection.<br /> File:Wcu config3.png|Illustration: WCU.<br /> File:Wcu config4.png|Illustration: Power Management.<br /> File:Wcu_config_wake_on_can.png|Illustration: Wake On CAN<br /> File:Wcu config5.png|Illustration: Upload.<br /> </gallery><br /> Version >= 2.41 of the portal has a new tab named I/O. You can read more about in [[I/O_configurations]].<br /> <br /> ===The Edit Car Dialog===<br /> [[File:Illustration37.png|frame|Illustration 37: Edit Car]]<br /> <br /> To edit the information about a car, press the “Edit Car” button. The dialog in Illustration 37 opens up.<br /> The entry you can not edit is the VIN entry. If you need to edit that you must instead create a new car.<br /> In order for the portal to be able to translate error codes into a human readable format, you must choose a diagnostic DB file to be used. It is important to select the correct one as the diagnostic error codes read out might be translated incorrectly or more probable, not at all. It is also important to select the right type of car using “Car type”. This controls the number of CAN buses and speeds and the number of Ethernet networks, if any, in the car. The “Active” check box controls whether the car should show up in tables and searches in general concerning cars. A car can never be removed as it has probably been involved in measurements but to recall an inactivated car you must actively select to view inactivated cars.<br /> <br /> It is possible to update several cars at once by selecting multiple cars and then press the “Edit Car” button. By doing this you can selectively make changes to attributes of all the selected cars at once. To do this, the dialog is extended as one can be seen in Illustration 38 below.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration38.png|frame|Illustration 38: Edit Car|center]]<br /> <br /> ===Upload a Car Import File===<br /> It is possible to import a file that describes a set of cars. It can consist of both new cars and cars already in the database but that might need to be updated with new information.<br /> A car import file consists of a comma separated file where each line describes a car. The first line of the file must look as follows:<br><br /> '''VIN,regNr,description,project,protoNumber,tsu,series'''<br /> <br /> There are seven attributes currently. When uploading the file you have a choice of modifying existing cars on the portal. If you do not check this box and there are cars that already exists, the import will fail.<br /> <br /> === Show or export SIM card ID ===<br /> The SIM card ID for a single WCU can be seen when right-clicking on a WCU in the Vehicles tab and selecting "Show info".<br /> <br /> SIM card ID's for one or multiple WCUs can also be exported as a csv file. Select the WCUs you are interested in (in the Vehicles tab) and press the button "Export SIM card info" located in the bottom row below the Vehicles grid. The downloaded file will contain five columns: WCU ID, WCU Name, RegNr (Plate nr), VIN and SIM Card ID. <br /> <br /> === Upload WCU file ===<br /> The WCU attributes 'WCU Name' and 'WCU Comment' can from version 2.43 of the portal be updated for multiple WCUs via a comma separated txt/xls/xlsx file. Click the "Upload WCU File" button to open up the import file to upload dialog.<br /> <br /> The uploaded file has the following requirements:<br /> * The file must have two mandatory columns with the names 'WCU ID' and 'WCU Name'.<br /> * Furthermore, an optional column named 'Comments' can be added. <br /> * The columns should be in said order.<br /> * The amount of columns on each row must match the amount of columns in the header. <br /> * The columns should be separated by using tab or by a comma.<br /> If there is a 'Comment' column and a blank comment on a row then the old comment, if any, for the specific WCU will be kept. <br /> <br /> To remove a comment from a WCU simply check the checkbox for erasing comments. Doing so will result in that empty comments in the uploaded file will erase current comments.<br /> <br /> ==Resource Groups==<br /> As described above in [[Vehicles#Resource Groups]], you can define a set of resource groups in order to easily handle large groups of resources collectively. An example is if you have 100<br /> WCUs in such a resource group and you would like to edit the configuration for all WCUs. Instead of having to open the configuration for each individual WCU, you simply open the configuration for the resource group, do your edits and when you press save, the configuration<br /> will be saved to all WCUs in one go. The resource groups are created in another panel which<br /> will be described later.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration39.png|frame|Illustration 39: Adding resources to a group.|left]]<br /> To add resources to a resource group you start by selecting the resources you are interested to add to a resource group. Resources already added to a resource group will render the corresponding add button disabled.<br /> <br /> When you are satisfied with your selection you press either the button “Add WCU(s) to resource group” or “Add car(s) to resource group”. Pressing any of those buttons will show the dialog to the left. The group box will list the available groups. If you know the name of the resource group you can type the name and as you type the box will show names that fit what you type.<br /> <br /> The three check boxes requires a deeper discussion of what the mean. Assume you have a resource group that has been used for some time. A new WCU enters the portal and you would like to add that WCU to your group. A common situation is that you would like that WCU to be configured that same way as the rest of the WCUs in the resource group. This is accomplished by checking “Update WCU configuration”. If this requires an update of the WCUs software it will automatically be taken care of. Also, a WCU comes configured with a set of modules. Usually you will probably want to update the module configurations as well but in case you wish not to, simply uncheck that check box. There are also situations where there are no module configurations for some modules and if you press “Add” you will be prompted about that. If you for some reason do care about that you can check the “Ignore non existent tools and configurations” check box.<br /> <br /> ==Modules for the WCU==<br /> A WCU can have a number of modules attached. This makes it possible to add new peripherals to the WCU for handling various tasks in acquiring measured data from a car. The nine types of modules are:<br /> # MCD-Hub<br /> # Canrecorder<br /> # GPS<br /> # IDC (Internal Diagnostic Client)<br /> # Uptime<br /> # State of Health<br /> # Signal Reader<br /> # RFE (Road Friction Estimation)<br /> # Blue piraT<br /> <br /> To deal with each tool's configuration a new view is presented below. To open this view, press the button “Modules” as shown in Illustration 33 on [[#The Vehicles Tab]].<br /> In the illustration above there are a set of tools present. Each type is grouped on the left side using a stack panel. Select the connected MCD-Hubs by selecting the MCD-Hub stack and select (click) the Canrecorder stack to see the canrecorders connected a so fourth.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration40.png|frame|Illustration 40: View for handling tool configurations.|center]]<br /> Each tool has its own entry in each of the stacks. In Illustration 40 above there is only one MCD-Hub present and it is “0”. Each tool is recognized with a tool ID which is set by the WCU. This ID is usually not descriptive and therefore you have the possibility to set a name of your likings. Change the name by pressing the button “Edit name”. You can also add a description to the tool that shows up as a “tool tip” when hovering over the name of the selected tool. Analogously, change the description by pressing the button “Edit tool description”. To reload the set of available tools for both MCD-Hub and Canrecorder, press the “Reload tools” button.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the MCD-Hub Module===<br /> The configuration for the MCD-Hub has only two settings. The first is the MCD-Hubs IP address and the second is the preferred firmware version. The other two configuration settings shown in Illustration 40 is “MCD-Hub firmware version” which shows the current version used by the hub and the second is “Last configuration update date” which states when the MCD-Hubs current configuration was brought into action.<br /> When you are done with your configuration you save it by pressing the “Save” button. If you for any reason need to reload the configuration, press the “Reload” button.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Canrecorder Module===<br /> The configuration for the Canrecorder is shown in Illustration 41 below. There are four fields of which two are editable. In order for the canrecorder to work you need to set the high- and low speed CAN bus. The update date says when the last configuration was enabled and the canrecorder version says which version of the canrecorder software is used.<br /> [[File:Illustration41.png|frame|Illustration 41: Configuration options for Canrecorder.|center]]<br /> <br /> ===Configure the GPS Module===<br /> There are four settings involved:<br /> <br /> # Enable GPS. Sets whether the GPS should be enabled or not. If you disable the GPS all the other settings will also be disabled.<br /> # GPS sampling interval. Sets the position sampling interval in seconds.<br /> # GPS monitor enabled. If this setting is enabled the WCU will continuously send its GPS position to the portal enabling real-time monitoring of the whereabouts of the WCU.<br /> # GPS monitor interval. Set how often the position will be updated. The interval is in seconds.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the IDC Module===<br /> [[File:Illustration42.png|frame|Illustration 42: Settings for the Internal Diagnostic Client (IDC).|center]]<br /> The IDC can be configured with which bus to communicate on given its assignment. You can actually even choose both where it will first try the Ethernet network (ETH), if it exists, and the CAN bus. If the car type in question does not have an Ethernet network, only the CAN option will appear.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Up-time Module===<br /> [[File:Illustration43.png|frame|Illustration 43: Settings for the Up-time module.|right]]<br /> The module is used to report how much and how long the WCU is running. First of all you can enable/disable the functionality all together with the “Enabled” check box. Next is how often the up-time should be logged in seconds. The second check box, “Monitor enabled” is used when you would like the module to report its up-time in real-time and the interval for that, also in seconds.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the State of Health Module===<br /> The state of health model has the same settings as the IDC module above.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Signal Reader Module===<br /> As of version 2.33 of the WCU software it is possible to monitor signals in real time.<br /> For this to happen you must enable the feature by checking the box “Enable monitor”. It is currently set at an update rate of once every second.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the RFE Module===<br /> From version 2.35 of the portal there is a possibility to upload up to three files to configure the RFE module. The three files are:<br /> # Configuration file<br /> # Certificate file<br /> # Binary file<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration44.png|frame|Illustration 44: Settings for the RFE module.|center]]<br /> <br /> === Configure the Blue piraT Module ===<br /> As of version 2.44 of the WICE portal it is possible to create blue piraT assignments. The blue piraT tool only has one configuration, the debug level, which determines the level of logging during the execution of the blue piraT assignments.<br /> <br /> ==The Administration Tab==<br /> This tab is a collection of the administrative tasks available in the portal. These are “Connect car to WCU”, “Archives”, “GDS/SDDB file”, “Resource Groups” and “Users”.<br /> <br /> ===Connect Car to WCU tab===<br /> To archive which car a specific WCU was in at the time an assignment was run can be done by connecting a car to a WCU in this tab. This is usually done automatically but in some situations it is necessary to do this manually<br /> <br /> The area is divided into two tables, one for searching WCUs, the left one, and one for searching cars, the right one. When you start typing the name of the WCU you are looking for in the upper left corner just above the table, matching WCUs appear in the left table. To find the car you are looking for, you do the same in the right table but here you have the option of using either the VIN or plate number.<br /> <br /> To connect a WCU with a car you drag the WCU you would like to connect onto the car in the right table. When you drop it onto a car a small icon will show signifying that the WCU and car are connected. <br /> <br /> From version 2.42 it is also possible to select a WCU and a Car and then click on the new "Connect" button located between the two grids.<br /> <br /> To disconnect a WCU and car you simply press the icon for wither of the WCU or car.<br /> See Illustration 45 below for an example.<br /> <br /> The connection is a sort of instantaneous carbon copy of the situation at the time that a task was created. If you later change the connection, already running/run tasks will not be affected.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration45.png|frame|Illustration 45: The connect Car to WCU tab.|center]]<br /> <br /> ===The User Administration Tab===<br /> The basic layout of the areas is just the same here as before. At the top you have a search area, in the middle is a result are and at the bottom are a set of buttons. The tab with a set of example users is in Illustration 46 below.<br /> The eight columns are:<br /> [[File:Illustration46.png|frame|none|left|Illustration 46: The user administration tab.]]<br /> <br /> * '''User ID'''. The unique ID that the user must enter when logging in.<br /> * '''Name'''. The name of the user.<br /> * '''Roles'''. Depending on which roles the user has to, he/she have different privileges. The roles are non-overlapping, i.e. being an “Admin” does not necessarily mean that you can do everything a “User” can do.<br /> * '''Enabled'''. Tells whether the account is enabled or not.<br /> * '''Email Address'''. By registering an email address a user can receive notifications via email from a WCU when certain event occurs.<br /> * '''Last login date'''. The date when the user last logged in.<br /> * '''Two factor auth'''. Whether the two-factor authentication is turned on for a particular user.<br /> * '''Logged in'''. You can see if the user is currently logged in.<br /> <br /> At the bottom there are eight buttons. They are:<br /> # The “New” button brings up the “New User” dialog which adds a new user to the portal<br /> # The “Edit” button brings up the “Edit User” dialog<br /> # The “Change Password” button brings up a dialog to change a user's password.<br /> # The “Create new secret” button. Pressing this generates a new cryptographic salt to be used when generating one-time passwords. If you do this for a user without enabling the possibility to see the secret on the next login, renders the user unable to login to the portal. No dialog is opened, simply a message saying that a new one has been generated is shown.<br /> # The “Show secret” button. Shows a dialog with the cryptographic salt shown in clear text as well as the QR-code, more on this later.<br /> # Edit roles and permissions<br /> # The “Save headers” button. Saves the headers and their order to be used as default on later logins.<br /> # Video. Start a video conversations with another user of the portal. You must have the software “Confero” installed for this to work.<br /> <br /> ====The New User Dialog====<br /> [[File:Illustration47.png|frame|Illustration 47: The New User Dialog]]<br /> By pressing the “New User” button the dialog in Illustration 47 below appears. Mandatory fields are User ID and the two password fields. Remember that the User ID must be unique and you will be notified if it is not. Click the “Add” button to add the user or change you mind by clicking “Cancel”.<br /> <br /> ====The Edit User Dialog====<br /> You can at any time modify a user by pressing the “Modify” button to bring up the dialog in Illustration 48 below. The User ID cannot be changed. A disabled account can not be used for logging onto the portal even if the correct user name and password are given. To modify the user roles, select or deselect a role by using the check boxes. To turn on two-factor authentication for a user, check the appropriate box. When you are satisfied with your modifications, press the “Save” button to make them permanent on the portal or press the “Cancel” button if you change your mind.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration48.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 48: The modify user dialog.]]<br /> <br /> To enable two factor authentication, tick the check box “Enable two factor authentication”. This will force the user to add another special one time password in addition to the account password when logging into the portal. The one time password is generated by a program on either your computer or if you want to you can install it on your smart phone which is probably the best solution. The program that generates one time password is based on a cryptographic salt and the current time. The cryptographic salt is randomly generated by the portal and is individual for each user. A secret can at any time be regenerated for a user which will render the user unable to login if you do not tick the check box “Show the secret to the user on their next login”.<br /> <br /> ====The Change Password Dialog====<br /> [[File:Illustration49.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 49: The change password dialog.]]<br /> To change a user's password, press the “Change Password” button and the dialog in X Y will appear. It is pretty straight forward as you type in the new password in the “New password” entry and you need to confirm it by typing it again in the entry below it. If you are satisfied, click the “Change” button or the “Cancel” button if you decide not to change the password.<br /> <br /> ====The Show Secret Window====<br /> [[File:Illustration50.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 50: The QR-code window]]<br /> A QR-code is shown that can be transferred to a smart phone by simply starting the authenticator app, point it at the screen and let the phone read the QR-code. An example of such a QR-code can be seen in Illustration 50. If the application that is to be used as a password generator do not support QR codes, the secret is shown in clear text at the top.<br /> <br /> {{: Roles and permissions}}<br /> ===The GDS/SDDB File Tab===<br /> In order for the portal to be able to translate error codes into a human readable format, a GDS or SDDB file must be selected for a vehicle. The set of GDS/SDDB files to choose from is administered in this tab, see Illustration 56 below. <br /> [[File:Illustration53.png|left|frame|Illustration 56: The GDS/SDDB file view.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> To upload a new GDS/SDDB file, press upload new file and you will be presented with dialog where you select the file, sets an optional name (if no name is entered, the file name is used) and an optional comment. To upload a new file for an existing entry, press the edit file button and you will be presented with a dialog where you can upload a new file. To edit the comment or the name that should show up when select which GDS/SDDB file to use for a vehicle, simply double click the cell and edit directly in the table.<br /> <br /> ===The Resource Groups Tab===<br /> This tab is used to administer some parts of the creation and destruction of resource groups and more. The panel for administering the resource groups is depicted in Illustration 57, below. <br /> [[File:Illustration54.png|left|frame|Illustration 57: The resource groups panel.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> At the top is a search field to search for resource groups. Next are two tables, side by side. The left table lists the resource groups found depending on your search criteria. When a resource group is selected, the resources that are part of the resource group are shown in the right table. Next, the functionality of the buttons will be covered.<br /> <br /> ====Add and Remove Resource Groups====<br /> [[File:Illustration55.png|thumb|Illustration 58: Add resource group dialog.]]<br /> To add a resource group you simply press the “New resource group” button and the following window will show. Type the name for the new resource and press “Create”. If you change your mind, press the “Cancel” button. Resource groups are global and writable and that means that names must be unique. The reason for this is that a resource group name takes on the form as both the resources car and WCU and those must be unique and therefore the resource groups must also be unique. One can, however, imagine situations where this must not be enforced but at the moment this is the case.<br /> <br /> To remove a resource group, press the “Remove resource group” button. Be aware that no warning is given if there are resources in the group when removing it.<br /> <br /> ====Manipulating Resources in a Resource Group====<br /> In the right hand table in Illustration 59 below, you see a set of resources for a resource group. <br /> [[File:Illustration56.png|left|frame|Illustration 59: Manipulating resources in a resource group.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> Here are both WCUs and cars part of the group. In addition to the type there is a column named “Synchronized”. That column only applies to WCUs. The use of this column is as follows. Assume you have a resource group consisting of 50 WCUs. Further, lets make a configuration change to that resource group. Depending on where the WCUs geographically are and how they are used the WCUs will be updated at different times. How do you you know when all WCUs are up to date in the resource group? You could check them individually in the “Vehicles” panel but that is not very elegant and time saving. Instead, just watch the “Synchronized” column for the WCUs. When a WCU is up to date with respect to the group configuration the column will read “true”. The value is updated each 30 seconds.<br /> <br /> You can remove individual resources from a group by selecting the resource and then press the “Remove resource” button.<br /> <br /> Yet another button remains and it is the button “Base Group on Resource”. When you add a WCU to a resource group in the “Vehicles” panel you have the option of not updating the WCU configuration to match the one of the resource group's, see Illustration 39 in [[#Resource Groups]]. Using this function it is possible to base the whole group on a WCU's configuration rather than the group's configuration.<br /> <br /> ===The WCU Status Tab===<br /> This view is supposed to be used as for supervising a set of vehicles. The supervision done in real time and the values for the set of vehicles are updated as soon as they arrive on the server from the different vehicles.<br /> <br /> The set of status information collected comprises three parts:<br /> <br /> '''General information:'''<br /> * Alive, a heart beat signal<br /> * Connectivity, what data rates are currently available to the vehicle.<br /> ** 3G<br /> ** 2G<br /> ** none<br /> * Cell Signal Quality (CSQ). Indicates the signal strength of the mobile modem. The values are between 0 – 31, the higher the value the better. The special value of 99 is designated an unknown or not even detectable signal.<br /> * GPS, simply a binary indicator of fix or no fix for the GPS.<br /> <br /> '''Data Storage Usage:'''<br><br /> This set of data informs how much collected data resides in the WCU for each type of data collector (module). Total data indicates how much of the total amount of data storage available is used. After that, each type of data collector is lined up.<br /> <br /> '''Data Collection Status:'''<br><br /> When modules collect data they go through a set of states when triggers starts, stops and other events occur. Currently, only such events for the signal reader module is available. An optional message accompanying the current state is shown in parenthesis.<br /> <br /> The screen is divided in two parts, on the left hand side is a table with search functionality for finding the vehicles of interest and on the right hand side is the monitored vehicles. To monitor a vehicles you search for it in the table and then drag and drop the vehicle on the right hand panel.<br /> <br /> A view of the panel is depicted in Illustration 60 below.<br /> [[File:Illustration57.png|left|frame|Illustration 60: The WCU Status tab.]]</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&diff=782 The Portal Administrator View 2017-07-20T13:02:03Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: Undo revision 781 by Carl.ridderstolpe (talk)</p> <hr /> <div>An administrator can do everything a user can do and more. In addition to the user, an administrator can create and modify users and stop assignments for any task. <br /> These new functions will be explained in the next 3 chapters.<br /> <br /> We will start with the search tab where two more buttons are visible. Next is the vehicles tab.<br /> Lastly is the administration tab with 5 sub tabs consisting of: the connect tab, the archives tab the<br /> GDS/SDDB files tab, the resource groups tab and the users tab.<br /> <br /> ==The Search Tab==<br /> [[File:Admin stop assigment.png|thumb|200x200px|Illustration 32a: Stop running assignment]]<br /> [[File:Admin force stop assignment.png|thumb|200x200px|Illustration 32b: Force stop assignment]]<br /> In addition to the functionality for an ordinary user, an administrator have one more button present. An administrator can send a force stop command to any WCU. <br /> <br /> Illustration 32a shows the "Stop assigment" button. This button is the same as for the ordinary user and is used to stop a running assignment. When a running assignment is stopped, it changes state to "Stop pending". This means that the portal is waiting for a stop message from the WCU before the state is changed to "Stopped" in the portal view. The administrator view exclusive "Force Stop Assignment" button, which can be seen in illustration 32b, forces a "Stop pending" assignment into "Stopped" state without waiting for the stop signal from the WCU. <br /> <br /> Also, the administrator can search and view any user's task.<br /> <br /> ==The Vehicles Tab==<br /> An administrator can do quite a many things in this view. Illustration 33 shows an example of this view. The table header along with the buttons “Edit Description” and “Get Log Files” are explained in the page for '''[[Vehicles]]'''. <br /> <br /> At the bottom you have a set of buttons to aid in handling the WCUs. To add a new WCU to the portal, the “New” buttons opens up a dialog for that. The “Get Log Files” button fetches log files for the selected WCU from the portal.<br /> <br /> [[File:42vehiclestab.png|none|left|frame|Illustration 33: The administrator's view in the WCUs tab.]]<br /> <br /> ===The New WCU Dialog===<br /> [[File:Illustration34.png|frame|Illustration 34: The Add New WCU Dialog.]]<br /> There are two ways that a WCU can enter the portal. The first is if you click the “New WCU” button and the second is the first time a WCU connects to the portal it registers itself. Ideally you will never have to add a WCU to the portal but just as a safety step you have the opportunity to add it yourself. When clicking the “New WCU” button the dialog in Illustration 34 opens up. You must enter the ID of the WCU as this is a unique identifier and you will be notified if the ID is already present on the portal. The description is optional but may be handy to remember which WCU it is.<br /> <br /> ===Edit the WCU Configuration===<br /> [[File:Wcu config1.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Modules.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config2.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Connection.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config3.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: WCU.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config4.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Power management.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu_config_wake_on_can.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Wake On CAN]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config5.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Upload.]]<br /> You can edit the configuration of the WCU from the portal. Simply click on '''Edit Configuration''' to open up the window in "Illustration: WCU Configuration: Modules". The WCU configuration window is divided into five tabs where each tab is described below. <br /> <br /> ====Modules====<br /> The set of check boxes for the different modules that are present is nine and are at the top. Check or uncheck these to tell the WCU if they are present or not. Doing so will speed up the boot process.<br /> <br /> To edit "Car type", click on the field where the car type is the displayed to open the "Edit car" dialog. This dialog is described in section [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog]]<br /> <br /> The last three check boxes, "Run IDC at boot", "Run IDC at ignition off" and "Enable VIN reader" is self-explanatory.<br /> <br /> ====Connection====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Connection" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Internet Service Provider (ISP)<br /> | Which ISP to use when multiple SIM cards are installed<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | WICE portal address<br /> | The server that the WCU should use for fetching new assignments etc.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | DRO Server<br /> | The server to connect to when doing a DRO.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> ====WCU====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: WCU" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Unit ID:<br /> | The ID cannot be changed from the portal. It can only be changed by logging on to the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Platform type:<br /> | The WCU platform type.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Platform subtype:<br /> | The WCU platform subtype.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | WCU software version:<br /> | This is the currenly used WCU software version.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Preferred WCU software:<br /> | This is the new preferred WCU software version to be installed.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Perform reset on update:<br /> | Removes all data on the WCU when installing a new WCU software.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | MX4 firmware version:<br /> | The currently used MX4 firmware version.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Preferred MX4 firmware:<br /> | The new preferred MX4 firmware.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> From version 2.40 of the WCU software, all WCUs report its platform type. The platform type determines, among other things, the number of available CAN buses in the IO tab. (see [[I/O configurations]]) Since a resource group is a collection of WCUs it has no platform type of its own to report. From version 2.41 of the portal the user has the option to set a fictive platform type for a resource group. This is also a prerequisite to also set the [[I/O configurations]] for a resource group. The platform type (and eventual subtype) is set in the WCU tab. If the resource group has members with other platform type(s) than the type that is about to be set, the user will get a warning.<br /> <br /> If the platform type of the resource group differs from the platform type of its members the I/O tab will be disabled. This is also the case when the platform type of the resource group and one member is the same but another member has another platform type.<br /> <br /> From version 2.42 it is possible to update the WCU root password. To update the password, write the new password in "Set root password" and save the configuration.<br /> <br /> ====Power Management====<br /> [[File:Periodic wake up time.png|thumb|frame|Illustration: Perodic wake-up]]<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Power management " and the tab content is described below.<br /> <br /> “Power mode” has two settings, Sleep and cut-off. In cut-off the MCD-Hub is not powered up on boot, nor is the WCU woken up at regular intervals to report battery voltage, GPS position etc.<br /> <br /> In the other mode, sleep, some more settings are visible as shown in "Illustration: Wake On Can". <br /> You can select the WCU to remain unpowered by selecting "External cut-off". In addition, you may enable the WCus wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time”. The “Periodic run-time” determines how long time the WCU should be awake before going back to sleep. The “Periodic wake-up time” indicates the time for each new wake up cycle.<br /> <br /> From version 2.43 it is also possible to set power mode to "deep sleep" for WCUs running on platform MX4 T20/T30 and MX4 V61. The configuration is the same as for mode "sleep".<br /> <br /> '''Example: ''' <br /> A periodic run-time of 600 seconds means that the WCU will be alive for 600 seconds (10 minutes). A periodic wake-up time of 3600 seconds means that the WCU will start a new run-time (600 seconds in this case) every new hour. (3600 seconds = 60 min). The sleep time in each cycle is, for the general case, the wake-up time minus the run-time and in this example 3600 minus 600 = 3000 seconds (50 min).<br /> This example is illustrated in illustration "Perodic wake-up.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ====Upload====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Upload" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Mobile upload limit<br /> | Defines the maximum data size that should be transferred via the mobile network. If the data size is larger than that the WCU will wait until a connection to a local network can be established. The size is in Mbytes.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Post run grace timeout<br /> | The number of seconds to wait before communicating with the MCD-Hub and portal, if the ignition is turned off.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload timeout<br /> | The maximum number of seconds the WCU should upload data before stopping.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Erase error code<br /> | If turned on the error codes in the car will be reset.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload data at boot<br /> | Uploads data when the WCU boots up<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload data at ignition off<br /> | Uploads data when the car is turned off<br /> |}<br /> <gallery widths="150px" mode="nolines"><br /> File:Wcu config1.png|Illustration: Modules.<br /> File:Wcu config2.png|Illustration: Connection.<br /> File:Wcu config3.png|Illustration: WCU.<br /> File:Wcu config4.png|Illustration: Power Management.<br /> File:Wcu_config_wake_on_can.png|Illustration: Wake On CAN<br /> File:Wcu config5.png|Illustration: Upload.<br /> </gallery><br /> Version >= 2.41 of the portal has a new tab named I/O. You can read more about in [[I/O_configurations]].<br /> <br /> ===The Edit Car Dialog===<br /> [[File:Illustration37.png|frame|Illustration 37: Edit Car]]<br /> <br /> To edit the information about a car, press the “Edit Car” button. The dialog in Illustration 37 opens up.<br /> The entry you can not edit is the VIN entry. If you need to edit that you must instead create a new car.<br /> In order for the portal to be able to translate error codes into a human readable format, you must choose a diagnostic DB file to be used. It is important to select the correct one as the diagnostic error codes read out might be translated incorrectly or more probable, not at all. It is also important to select the right type of car using “Car type”. This controls the number of CAN buses and speeds and the number of Ethernet networks, if any, in the car. The “Active” check box controls whether the car should show up in tables and searches in general concerning cars. A car can never be removed as it has probably been involved in measurements but to recall an inactivated car you must actively select to view inactivated cars.<br /> <br /> It is possible to update several cars at once by selecting multiple cars and then press the “Edit Car” button. By doing this you can selectively make changes to attributes of all the selected cars at once. To do this, the dialog is extended as one can be seen in Illustration 38 below.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration38.png|frame|Illustration 38: Edit Car|center]]<br /> <br /> ===Upload a Car Import File===<br /> It is possible to import a file that describes a set of cars. It can consist of both new cars and cars already in the database but that might need to be updated with new information.<br /> A car import file consists of a comma separated file where each line describes a car. The first line of the file must look as follows:<br><br /> '''VIN,regNr,description,project,protoNumber,tsu,series'''<br /> <br /> There are seven attributes currently. When uploading the file you have a choice of modifying existing cars on the portal. If you do not check this box and there are cars that already exists, the import will fail.<br /> <br /> === Show or export SIM card ID ===<br /> The SIM card ID for a single WCU can be seen when right-clicking on a WCU in the Vehicles tab and selecting "Show info".<br /> <br /> SIM card ID's for one or multiple WCUs can also be exported as a csv file. Select the WCUs you are interested in (in the Vehicles tab) and press the button "Export SIM card info" located in the bottom row below the Vehicles grid. The downloaded file will contain five columns: WCU ID, WCU Name, RegNr (Plate nr), VIN and SIM Card ID. <br /> <br /> === Upload WCU file ===<br /> The WCU attributes 'WCU Name' and 'WCU Comment' can from version 2.43 of the portal be updated for multiple WCUs via a comma separated txt/xls/xlsx file. Click the "Upload WCU File" button to open up the import file to upload dialog.<br /> <br /> The uploaded file has the following requirements:<br /> * The file must have two mandatory columns with the names 'WCU ID' and 'WCU Name'.<br /> * Furthermore, an optional column named 'Comments' can be added. <br /> * The columns should be in said order.<br /> * The amount of columns on each row must match the amount of columns in the header. <br /> * The columns should be separated by using tab or by a comma.<br /> If there is a 'Comment' column and a blank comment on a row then the old comment, if any, for the specific WCU will be kept. <br /> <br /> To remove a comment from a WCU simply check the checkbox for erasing comments. Doing so will result in that empty comments in the uploaded file will erase current comments.<br /> <br /> ==Resource Groups==<br /> As described above in [[Vehicles#Resource Groups]], you can define a set of resource groups in order to easily handle large groups of resources collectively. An example is if you have 100<br /> WCUs in such a resource group and you would like to edit the configuration for all WCUs. Instead of having to open the configuration for each individual WCU, you simply open the configuration for the resource group, do your edits and when you press save, the configuration<br /> will be saved to all WCUs in one go. The resource groups are created in another panel which<br /> will be described later.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration39.png|frame|Illustration 39: Adding resources to a group.|left]]<br /> To add resources to a resource group you start by selecting the resources you are interested to add to a resource group. Resources already added to a resource group will render the corresponding add button disabled.<br /> <br /> When you are satisfied with your selection you press either the button “Add WCU(s) to resource group” or “Add car(s) to resource group”. Pressing any of those buttons will show the dialog to the left. The group box will list the available groups. If you know the name of the resource group you can type the name and as you type the box will show names that fit what you type.<br /> <br /> The three check boxes requires a deeper discussion of what the mean. Assume you have a resource group that has been used for some time. A new WCU enters the portal and you would like to add that WCU to your group. A common situation is that you would like that WCU to be configured that same way as the rest of the WCUs in the resource group. This is accomplished by checking “Update WCU configuration”. If this requires an update of the WCUs software it will automatically be taken care of. Also, a WCU comes configured with a set of modules. Usually you will probably want to update the module configurations as well but in case you wish not to, simply uncheck that check box. There are also situations where there are no module configurations for some modules and if you press “Add” you will be prompted about that. If you for some reason do care about that you can check the “Ignore non existent tools and configurations” check box.<br /> <br /> ==Modules for the WCU==<br /> A WCU can have a number of modules attached. This makes it possible to add new peripherals to the WCU for handling various tasks in acquiring measured data from a car. The nine types of modules are:<br /> # MCD-Hub<br /> # Canrecorder<br /> # GPS<br /> # IDC (Internal Diagnostic Client)<br /> # Uptime<br /> # State of Health<br /> # Signal Reader<br /> # RFE (Road Friction Estimation)<br /> # Blue piraT<br /> <br /> To deal with each tool's configuration a new view is presented below. To open this view, press the button “Modules” as shown in Illustration 33 on [[#The Vehicles Tab]].<br /> In the illustration above there are a set of tools present. Each type is grouped on the left side using a stack panel. Select the connected MCD-Hubs by selecting the MCD-Hub stack and select (click) the Canrecorder stack to see the canrecorders connected a so fourth.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration40.png|frame|Illustration 40: View for handling tool configurations.|center]]<br /> Each tool has its own entry in each of the stacks. In Illustration 40 above there is only one MCD-Hub present and it is “0”. Each tool is recognized with a tool ID which is set by the WCU. This ID is usually not descriptive and therefore you have the possibility to set a name of your likings. Change the name by pressing the button “Edit name”. You can also add a description to the tool that shows up as a “tool tip” when hovering over the name of the selected tool. Analogously, change the description by pressing the button “Edit tool description”. To reload the set of available tools for both MCD-Hub and Canrecorder, press the “Reload tools” button.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the MCD-Hub Module===<br /> The configuration for the MCD-Hub has only two settings. The first is the MCD-Hubs IP address and the second is the preferred firmware version. The other two configuration settings shown in Illustration 40 is “MCD-Hub firmware version” which shows the current version used by the hub and the second is “Last configuration update date” which states when the MCD-Hubs current configuration was brought into action.<br /> When you are done with your configuration you save it by pressing the “Save” button. If you for any reason need to reload the configuration, press the “Reload” button.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Canrecorder Module===<br /> The configuration for the Canrecorder is shown in Illustration 41 below. There are four fields of which two are editable. In order for the canrecorder to work you need to set the high- and low speed CAN bus. The update date says when the last configuration was enabled and the canrecorder version says which version of the canrecorder software is used.<br /> [[File:Illustration41.png|frame|Illustration 41: Configuration options for Canrecorder.|center]]<br /> <br /> ===Configure the GPS Module===<br /> There are four settings involved:<br /> <br /> # Enable GPS. Sets whether the GPS should be enabled or not. If you disable the GPS all the other settings will also be disabled.<br /> # GPS sampling interval. Sets the position sampling interval in seconds.<br /> # GPS monitor enabled. If this setting is enabled the WCU will continuously send its GPS position to the portal enabling real-time monitoring of the whereabouts of the WCU.<br /> # GPS monitor interval. Set how often the position will be updated. The interval is in seconds.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the IDC Module===<br /> [[File:Illustration42.png|frame|Illustration 42: Settings for the Internal Diagnostic Client (IDC).|center]]<br /> The IDC can be configured with which bus to communicate on given its assignment. You can actually even choose both where it will first try the Ethernet network (ETH), if it exists, and the CAN bus. If the car type in question does not have an Ethernet network, only the CAN option will appear.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Up-time Module===<br /> [[File:Illustration43.png|frame|Illustration 43: Settings for the Up-time module.|right]]<br /> The module is used to report how much and how long the WCU is running. First of all you can enable/disable the functionality all together with the “Enabled” check box. Next is how often the up-time should be logged in seconds. The second check box, “Monitor enabled” is used when you would like the module to report its up-time in real-time and the interval for that, also in seconds.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the State of Health Module===<br /> The state of health model has the same settings as the IDC module above.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Signal Reader Module===<br /> As of version 2.33 of the WCU software it is possible to monitor signals in real time.<br /> For this to happen you must enable the feature by checking the box “Enable monitor”. It is currently set at an update rate of once every second.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the RFE Module===<br /> From version 2.35 of the portal there is a possibility to upload up to three files to configure the RFE module. The three files are:<br /> # Configuration file<br /> # Certificate file<br /> # Binary file<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration44.png|frame|Illustration 44: Settings for the RFE module.|center]]<br /> <br /> === Configure the Blue piraT Module ===<br /> As of version 2.44 of the WICE portal it is possible to create blue piraT assignments. The blue piraT tool only has one configuration, the debug level, which determines the level of logging during the execution of the blue piraT assignments.<br /> <br /> ==The Administration Tab==<br /> This tab is a collection of the administrative tasks available in the portal. These are “Connect car to WCU”, “Archives”, “GDS/SDDB file”, “Resource Groups” and “Users”.<br /> <br /> ===Connect Car to WCU tab===<br /> To archive which car a specific WCU was in at the time an assignment was run can be done by connecting a car to a WCU in this tab. This is usually done automatically but in some situations it is necessary to do this manually<br /> <br /> The area is divided into two tables, one for searching WCUs, the left one, and one for searching cars, the right one. When you start typing the name of the WCU you are looking for in the upper left corner just above the table, matching WCUs appear in the left table. To find the car you are looking for, you do the same in the right table but here you have the option of using either the VIN or plate number.<br /> <br /> To connect a WCU with a car you drag the WCU you would like to connect onto the car in the right table. When you drop it onto a car a small icon will show signifying that the WCU and car are connected. <br /> <br /> From version 2.42 it is also possible to select a WCU and a Car and then click on the new "Connect" button located between the two grids.<br /> <br /> To disconnect a WCU and car you simply press the icon for wither of the WCU or car.<br /> See Illustration 45 below for an example.<br /> <br /> The connection is a sort of instantaneous carbon copy of the situation at the time that a task was created. If you later change the connection, already running/run tasks will not be affected.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration45.png|frame|Illustration 45: The connect Car to WCU tab.|center]]<br /> <br /> ===The User Administration Tab===<br /> The basic layout of the areas is just the same here as before. At the top you have a search area, in the middle is a result are and at the bottom are a set of buttons. The tab with a set of example users is in Illustration 46 below.<br /> The eight columns are:<br /> [[File:Illustration46.png|frame|none|left|Illustration 46: The user administration tab.]]<br /> <br /> * '''User ID'''. The unique ID that the user must enter when logging in.<br /> * '''Name'''. The name of the user.<br /> * '''Roles'''. Depending on which roles the user has to, he/she have different privileges. The roles are non-overlapping, i.e. being an “Admin” does not necessarily mean that you can do everything a “User” can do.<br /> * '''Enabled'''. Tells whether the account is enabled or not.<br /> * '''Email Address'''. By registering an email address a user can receive notifications via email from a WCU when certain event occurs.<br /> * '''Last login date'''. The date when the user last logged in.<br /> * '''Two factor auth'''. Whether the two-factor authentication is turned on for a particular user.<br /> * '''Logged in'''. You can see if the user is currently logged in.<br /> <br /> At the bottom there are eight buttons. They are:<br /> # The “New” button brings up the “New User” dialog which adds a new user to the portal<br /> # The “Edit” button brings up the “Edit User” dialog<br /> # The “Change Password” button brings up a dialog to change a user's password.<br /> # The “Create new secret” button. Pressing this generates a new cryptographic salt to be used when generating one-time passwords. If you do this for a user without enabling the possibility to see the secret on the next login, renders the user unable to login to the portal. No dialog is opened, simply a message saying that a new one has been generated is shown.<br /> # The “Show secret” button. Shows a dialog with the cryptographic salt shown in clear text as well as the QR-code, more on this later.<br /> # Edit roles and permissions<br /> # The “Save headers” button. Saves the headers and their order to be used as default on later logins.<br /> # Video. Start a video conversations with another user of the portal. You must have the software “Confero” installed for this to work.<br /> <br /> ====The New User Dialog====<br /> [[File:Illustration47.png|frame|Illustration 47: The New User Dialog]]<br /> By pressing the “New User” button the dialog in Illustration 47 below appears. Mandatory fields are User ID and the two password fields. Remember that the User ID must be unique and you will be notified if it is not. Click the “Add” button to add the user or change you mind by clicking “Cancel”.<br /> <br /> ====The Edit User Dialog====<br /> You can at any time modify a user by pressing the “Modify” button to bring up the dialog in Illustration 48 below. The User ID cannot be changed. A disabled account can not be used for logging onto the portal even if the correct user name and password are given. To modify the user roles, select or deselect a role by using the check boxes. To turn on two-factor authentication for a user, check the appropriate box. When you are satisfied with your modifications, press the “Save” button to make them permanent on the portal or press the “Cancel” button if you change your mind.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration48.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 48: The modify user dialog.]]<br /> <br /> To enable two factor authentication, tick the check box “Enable two factor authentication”. This will force the user to add another special one time password in addition to the account password when logging into the portal. The one time password is generated by a program on either your computer or if you want to you can install it on your smart phone which is probably the best solution. The program that generates one time password is based on a cryptographic salt and the current time. The cryptographic salt is randomly generated by the portal and is individual for each user. A secret can at any time be regenerated for a user which will render the user unable to login if you do not tick the check box “Show the secret to the user on their next login”.<br /> <br /> ====The Change Password Dialog====<br /> [[File:Illustration49.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 49: The change password dialog.]]<br /> To change a user's password, press the “Change Password” button and the dialog in X Y will appear. It is pretty straight forward as you type in the new password in the “New password” entry and you need to confirm it by typing it again in the entry below it. If you are satisfied, click the “Change” button or the “Cancel” button if you decide not to change the password.<br /> <br /> ====The Show Secret Window====<br /> [[File:Illustration50.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 50: The QR-code window]]<br /> A QR-code is shown that can be transferred to a smart phone by simply starting the authenticator app, point it at the screen and let the phone read the QR-code. An example of such a QR-code can be seen in Illustration 50. If the application that is to be used as a password generator do not support QR codes, the secret is shown in clear text at the top.<br /> <br /> {{: Roles and permissions}}<br /> ====Edit roles and permission====<br /> In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> <br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of two tables. The top table holds the roles and the bottom one hold the selected role's.<br /> <br /> <br clear="all"> <br /> [[File:Illustration51.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “New” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the button “Delete”. Role names must be unique. You can optionally add a description to the role. To edit a description for an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top the table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be list of resources that the permission applies to. Resource groups can also be selected as a resource. This means that the permission will be applied to those resources.<br /> <br /> Each permission can be edited, deleted and you can create new permissions. When a permission is selected the buttons for editing and deleting permissions will be enabled.<br /> <br /> '''Creating a new permission'''<br><br /> To create a new permission press the “New” button. It opens the following interaction depicted below.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration52.png|left|frame|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> A permission consists of five parts:<br /> # ''The resource type''. Which resource type should the permission apply to. Currently there are two resource types, WCU and Car.<br /> # ''Resource subtype''. Which subtype does the permission apply to. The set of subtypes currently is:<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type.<br /> ## '''Conf'''. The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> # ''Subtype type''. The above subtypes module, assignment and monitor uses this part of the permission as well. The reason is that these permissions is applied to the modules individually. In essence, you can have a permission to create IDC assignments but not MCD-Hub assignments as an example. Not all modules have assignments as well, and therefore, assignment and monitor types only has a subset of all modules. There is one last option, the All option. That option implies that the permission applies to all current and future subtype types.<br /> # ''Read/Write''. As the name tells it is a read/write control of the permission. As an example for a permission saying “wcu:assignment:mcdhub:write” means that a user is allowed to write assignments, i.e. create new assignments of MCD-Hub type. If this permission instead ends with read, it means the use can view such assignments, typically this applies to what is listed in the Search tab.<br /> <br /> '''Selection of actual resources to apply the permission to'''<br><br /> The last part of a permission is to select to which resources it will apply. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 52. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group.<br /> To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow.<br /> There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> <br /> When you are done, press the button “Save permission”. If you change your mind, press “Cancel” instead.<br /> <br /> '''Edit a permission'''<br><br /> To edit an already existing permission, select the permission and then press the “Edit” button. This will open an interaction similar to when creating a new permission, however, with the two topmost parts locked for editing, i.e. the selections resource type and resource subtype disabled.<br /> When you are done editing press “Save permission” to save the changes or press “Cancel” to undo.<br /> <br /> ===The GDS/SDDB File Tab===<br /> In order for the portal to be able to translate error codes into a human readable format, a GDS or SDDB file must be selected for a vehicle. The set of GDS/SDDB files to choose from is administered in this tab, see Illustration 53 below. <br /> [[File:Illustration53.png|left|frame|Illustration 53: The GDS/SDDB file view.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> To upload a new GDS/SDDB file, press upload new file and you will be presented with dialog where you select the file, sets an optional name (if no name is entered, the file name is used) and an optional comment. To upload a new file for an existing entry, press the edit file button and you will be presented with a dialog where you can upload a new file. To edit the comment or the name that should show up when select which GDS/SDDB file to use for a vehicle, simply double click the cell and edit directly in the table.<br /> <br /> ===The Resource Groups Tab===<br /> This tab is used to administer some parts of the creation and destruction of resource groups and more. The panel for administering the resource groups is depicted in Illustration 54, below. <br /> [[File:Illustration54.png|left|frame|Illustration 54: The resource groups panel.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> At the top is a search field to search for resource groups. Next are two tables, side by side. The left table lists the resource groups found depending on your search criteria. When a resource group is selected, the resources that are part of the resource group are shown in the right table. Next, the functionality of the buttons will be covered.<br /> <br /> ====Add and Remove Resource Groups====<br /> [[File:Illustration55.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 55: Add resource group dialog.]]<br /> To add a resource group you simply press the “New resource group” button and the following window will show. Type the name for the new resource and press “Create”. If you change your mind, press the “Cancel” button. Resource groups are global and writable and that means that names must be unique. The reason for this is that a resource group name takes on the form as both the resources car and WCU and those must be unique and therefore the resource groups must also be unique. One can, however, imagine situations where this must not be enforced but at the moment this is the case.<br /> <br /> To remove a resource group, press the “Remove resource group” button. Be aware that no warning is given if there are resources in the group when removing it.<br /> <br /> ====Manipulating Resources in a Resource Group====<br /> In the right hand table in Illustration 56 below, you see a set of resources for a resource group. <br /> [[File:Illustration56.png|left|frame|Illustration 56: Manipulating resources in a resource group.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> Here are both WCUs and cars part of the group. In addition to the type there is a column named “Synchronized”. That column only applies to WCUs. The use of this column is as follows. Assume you have a resource group consisting of 50 WCUs. Further, lets make a configuration change to that resource group. Depending on where the WCUs geographically are and how they are used the WCUs will be updated at different times. How do you you know when all WCUs are up to date in the resource group? You could check them individually in the “Vehicles” panel but that is not very elegant and time saving. Instead, just watch the “Synchronized” column for the WCUs. When a WCU is up to date with respect to the group configuration the column will read “true”. The value is updated each 30 seconds.<br /> <br /> You can remove individual resources from a group by selecting the resource and then press the “Remove resource” button.<br /> <br /> Yet another button remains and it is the button “Base Group on Resource”. When you add a WCU to a resource group in the “Vehicles” panel you have the option of not updating the WCU configuration to match the one of the resource group's, see Illustration 39 in [[#Resource Groups]]. Using this function it is possible to base the whole group on a WCU's configuration rather than the group's configuration.<br /> <br /> ===The WCU Status Tab===<br /> This view is supposed to be used as for supervising a set of vehicles. The supervision done in real time and the values for the set of vehicles are updated as soon as they arrive on the server from the different vehicles.<br /> <br /> The set of status information collected comprises three parts:<br /> <br /> '''General information:'''<br /> * Alive, a heart beat signal<br /> * Connectivity, what data rates are currently available to the vehicle.<br /> ** 3G<br /> ** 2G<br /> ** none<br /> * Cell Signal Quality (CSQ). Indicates the signal strength of the mobile modem. The values are between 0 – 31, the higher the value the better. The special value of 99 is designated an unknown or not even detectable signal.<br /> * GPS, simply a binary indicator of fix or no fix for the GPS.<br /> <br /> '''Data Storage Usage:'''<br><br /> This set of data informs how much collected data resides in the WCU for each type of data collector (module). Total data indicates how much of the total amount of data storage available is used. After that, each type of data collector is lined up.<br /> <br /> '''Data Collection Status:'''<br><br /> When modules collect data they go through a set of states when triggers starts, stops and other events occur. Currently, only such events for the signal reader module is available. An optional message accompanying the current state is shown in parenthesis.<br /> <br /> The screen is divided in two parts, on the left hand side is a table with search functionality for finding the vehicles of interest and on the right hand side is the monitored vehicles. To monitor a vehicles you search for it in the table and then drag and drop the vehicle on the right hand panel.<br /> <br /> A view of the panel is depicted in Illustration 57 below.<br /> [[File:Illustration57.png|left|frame|Illustration 57: The WCU Status tab.]]</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&diff=781 The Portal Administrator View 2017-07-20T13:00:25Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>An administrator can do everything a user can do and more. In addition to the user, an administrator can create and modify users and stop assignments for any task. <br /> These new functions will be explained in the next 3 chapters.<br /> <br /> We will start with the search tab where two more buttons are visible. Next is the vehicles tab.<br /> Lastly is the administration tab with 5 sub tabs consisting of: the connect tab, the archives tab the<br /> GDS/SDDB files tab, the resource groups tab and the users tab.<br /> <br /> ==The Search Tab==<br /> [[File:Admin stop assigment.png|thumb|200x200px|Illustration 32a: Stop running assignment]]<br /> [[File:Admin force stop assignment.png|thumb|200x200px|Illustration 32b: Force stop assignment]]<br /> In addition to the functionality for an ordinary user, an administrator have one more button present. An administrator can send a force stop command to any WCU. <br /> <br /> Illustration 32a shows the "Stop assigment" button. This button is the same as for the ordinary user and is used to stop a running assignment. When a running assignment is stopped, it changes state to "Stop pending". This means that the portal is waiting for a stop message from the WCU before the state is changed to "Stopped" in the portal view. The administrator view exclusive "Force Stop Assignment" button, which can be seen in illustration 32b, forces a "Stop pending" assignment into "Stopped" state without waiting for the stop signal from the WCU. <br /> <br /> Also, the administrator can search and view any user's task.<br /> <br /> ==The Vehicles Tab==<br /> An administrator can do quite a many things in this view. Illustration 33 shows an example of this view. The table header along with the buttons “Edit Description” and “Get Log Files” are explained in the page for '''[[Vehicles]]'''. <br /> <br /> At the bottom you have a set of buttons to aid in handling the WCUs. To add a new WCU to the portal, the “New” buttons opens up a dialog for that. The “Get Log Files” button fetches log files for the selected WCU from the portal.<br /> <br /> [[File:42vehiclestab.png|none|left|frame|Illustration 33: The administrator's view in the WCUs tab.]]<br /> <br /> ===The New WCU Dialog===<br /> [[File:Illustration34.png|frame|Illustration 34: The Add New WCU Dialog.]]<br /> There are two ways that a WCU can enter the portal. The first is if you click the “New WCU” button and the second is the first time a WCU connects to the portal it registers itself. Ideally you will never have to add a WCU to the portal but just as a safety step you have the opportunity to add it yourself. When clicking the “New WCU” button the dialog in Illustration 34 opens up. You must enter the ID of the WCU as this is a unique identifier and you will be notified if the ID is already present on the portal. The description is optional but may be handy to remember which WCU it is.<br /> <br /> ===Edit the WCU Configuration===<br /> [[File:Wcu config1.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Modules.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config2.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Connection.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config3.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: WCU.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config4.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Power management.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu_config_wake_on_can.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Wake On CAN]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config5.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Upload.]]<br /> You can edit the configuration of the WCU from the portal. Simply click on '''Edit Configuration''' to open up the window in "Illustration: WCU Configuration: Modules". The WCU configuration window is divided into five tabs where each tab is described below. <br /> <br /> ====Modules====<br /> The set of check boxes for the different modules that are present is nine and are at the top. Check or uncheck these to tell the WCU if they are present or not. Doing so will speed up the boot process.<br /> <br /> To edit "Car type", click on the field where the car type is the displayed to open the "Edit car" dialog. This dialog is described in section [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog]]<br /> <br /> The last three check boxes, "Run IDC at boot", "Run IDC at ignition off" and "Enable VIN reader" is self-explanatory.<br /> <br /> ====Connection====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Connection" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Internet Service Provider (ISP)<br /> | Which ISP to use when multiple SIM cards are installed<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | WICE portal address<br /> | The server that the WCU should use for fetching new assignments etc.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | DRO Server<br /> | The server to connect to when doing a DRO.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> ====WCU====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: WCU" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Unit ID:<br /> | The ID cannot be changed from the portal. It can only be changed by logging on to the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Platform type:<br /> | The WCU platform type.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Platform subtype:<br /> | The WCU platform subtype.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | WCU software version:<br /> | This is the currenly used WCU software version.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Preferred WCU software:<br /> | This is the new preferred WCU software version to be installed.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Perform reset on update:<br /> | Removes all data on the WCU when installing a new WCU software.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | MX4 firmware version:<br /> | The currently used MX4 firmware version.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Preferred MX4 firmware:<br /> | The new preferred MX4 firmware.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> From version 2.40 of the WCU software, all WCUs report its platform type. The platform type determines, among other things, the number of available CAN buses in the IO tab. (see [[I/O configurations]]) Since a resource group is a collection of WCUs it has no platform type of its own to report. From version 2.41 of the portal the user has the option to set a fictive platform type for a resource group. This is also a prerequisite to also set the [[I/O configurations]] for a resource group. The platform type (and eventual subtype) is set in the WCU tab. If the resource group has members with other platform type(s) than the type that is about to be set, the user will get a warning.<br /> <br /> If the platform type of the resource group differs from the platform type of its members the I/O tab will be disabled. This is also the case when the platform type of the resource group and one member is the same but another member has another platform type.<br /> <br /> From version 2.42 it is possible to update the WCU root password. To update the password, write the new password in "Set root password" and save the configuration.<br /> <br /> ====Power Management====<br /> [[File:Periodic wake up time.png|thumb|frame|Illustration: Perodic wake-up]]<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Power management " and the tab content is described below.<br /> <br /> “Power mode” has two settings, Sleep and cut-off. In cut-off the MCD-Hub is not powered up on boot, nor is the WCU woken up at regular intervals to report battery voltage, GPS position etc.<br /> <br /> In the other mode, sleep, some more settings are visible as shown in "Illustration: Wake On Can". <br /> You can select the WCU to remain unpowered by selecting "External cut-off". In addition, you may enable the WCus wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time”. The “Periodic run-time” determines how long time the WCU should be awake before going back to sleep. The “Periodic wake-up time” indicates the time for each new wake up cycle.<br /> <br /> From version 2.43 it is also possible to set power mode to "deep sleep" for WCUs running on platform MX4 T20/T30 and MX4 V61. The configuration is the same as for mode "sleep".<br /> <br /> '''Example: ''' <br /> A periodic run-time of 600 seconds means that the WCU will be alive for 600 seconds (10 minutes). A periodic wake-up time of 3600 seconds means that the WCU will start a new run-time (600 seconds in this case) every new hour. (3600 seconds = 60 min). The sleep time in each cycle is, for the general case, the wake-up time minus the run-time and in this example 3600 minus 600 = 3000 seconds (50 min).<br /> This example is illustrated in illustration "Perodic wake-up.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ====Upload====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Upload" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Mobile upload limit<br /> | Defines the maximum data size that should be transferred via the mobile network. If the data size is larger than that the WCU will wait until a connection to a local network can be established. The size is in Mbytes.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Post run grace timeout<br /> | The number of seconds to wait before communicating with the MCD-Hub and portal, if the ignition is turned off.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload timeout<br /> | The maximum number of seconds the WCU should upload data before stopping.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Erase error code<br /> | If turned on the error codes in the car will be reset.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload data at boot<br /> | Uploads data when the WCU boots up<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload data at ignition off<br /> | Uploads data when the car is turned off<br /> |}<br /> <gallery widths="150px" mode="nolines"><br /> File:Wcu config1.png|Illustration: Modules.<br /> File:Wcu config2.png|Illustration: Connection.<br /> File:Wcu config3.png|Illustration: WCU.<br /> File:Wcu config4.png|Illustration: Power Management.<br /> File:Wcu_config_wake_on_can.png|Illustration: Wake On CAN<br /> File:Wcu config5.png|Illustration: Upload.<br /> </gallery><br /> Version >= 2.41 of the portal has a new tab named I/O. You can read more about in [[I/O_configurations]].<br /> <br /> ===The Edit Car Dialog===<br /> [[File:Illustration37.png|frame|Illustration 37: Edit Car]]<br /> <br /> To edit the information about a car, press the “Edit Car” button. The dialog in Illustration 37 opens up.<br /> The entry you can not edit is the VIN entry. If you need to edit that you must instead create a new car.<br /> In order for the portal to be able to translate error codes into a human readable format, you must choose a diagnostic DB file to be used. It is important to select the correct one as the diagnostic error codes read out might be translated incorrectly or more probable, not at all. It is also important to select the right type of car using “Car type”. This controls the number of CAN buses and speeds and the number of Ethernet networks, if any, in the car. The “Active” check box controls whether the car should show up in tables and searches in general concerning cars. A car can never be removed as it has probably been involved in measurements but to recall an inactivated car you must actively select to view inactivated cars.<br /> <br /> It is possible to update several cars at once by selecting multiple cars and then press the “Edit Car” button. By doing this you can selectively make changes to attributes of all the selected cars at once. To do this, the dialog is extended as one can be seen in Illustration 38 below.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration38.png|frame|Illustration 38: Edit Car|center]]<br /> <br /> ===Upload a Car Import File===<br /> It is possible to import a file that describes a set of cars. It can consist of both new cars and cars already in the database but that might need to be updated with new information.<br /> A car import file consists of a comma separated file where each line describes a car. The first line of the file must look as follows:<br><br /> '''VIN,regNr,description,project,protoNumber,tsu,series'''<br /> <br /> There are seven attributes currently. When uploading the file you have a choice of modifying existing cars on the portal. If you do not check this box and there are cars that already exists, the import will fail.<br /> <br /> === Show or export SIM card ID ===<br /> The SIM card ID for a single WCU can be seen when right-clicking on a WCU in the Vehicles tab and selecting "Show info".<br /> <br /> SIM card ID's for one or multiple WCUs can also be exported as a csv file. Select the WCUs you are interested in (in the Vehicles tab) and press the button "Export SIM card info" located in the bottom row below the Vehicles grid. The downloaded file will contain five columns: WCU ID, WCU Name, RegNr (Plate nr), VIN and SIM Card ID. <br /> <br /> === Upload WCU file ===<br /> The WCU attributes 'WCU Name' and 'WCU Comment' can from version 2.43 of the portal be updated for multiple WCUs via a comma separated txt/xls/xlsx file. Click the "Upload WCU File" button to open up the import file to upload dialog.<br /> <br /> The uploaded file has the following requirements:<br /> * The file must have two mandatory columns with the names 'WCU ID' and 'WCU Name'.<br /> * Furthermore, an optional column named 'Comments' can be added. <br /> * The columns should be in said order.<br /> * The amount of columns on each row must match the amount of columns in the header. <br /> * The columns should be separated by using tab or by a comma.<br /> If there is a 'Comment' column and a blank comment on a row then the old comment, if any, for the specific WCU will be kept. <br /> <br /> To remove a comment from a WCU simply check the checkbox for erasing comments. Doing so will result in that empty comments in the uploaded file will erase current comments.<br /> <br /> ==Resource Groups==<br /> As described above in [[Vehicles#Resource Groups]], you can define a set of resource groups in order to easily handle large groups of resources collectively. An example is if you have 100<br /> WCUs in such a resource group and you would like to edit the configuration for all WCUs. Instead of having to open the configuration for each individual WCU, you simply open the configuration for the resource group, do your edits and when you press save, the configuration<br /> will be saved to all WCUs in one go. The resource groups are created in another panel which<br /> will be described later.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration39.png|frame|Illustration 39: Adding resources to a group.|left]]<br /> To add resources to a resource group you start by selecting the resources you are interested to add to a resource group. Resources already added to a resource group will render the corresponding add button disabled.<br /> <br /> When you are satisfied with your selection you press either the button “Add WCU(s) to resource group” or “Add car(s) to resource group”. Pressing any of those buttons will show the dialog to the left. The group box will list the available groups. If you know the name of the resource group you can type the name and as you type the box will show names that fit what you type.<br /> <br /> The three check boxes requires a deeper discussion of what the mean. Assume you have a resource group that has been used for some time. A new WCU enters the portal and you would like to add that WCU to your group. A common situation is that you would like that WCU to be configured that same way as the rest of the WCUs in the resource group. This is accomplished by checking “Update WCU configuration”. If this requires an update of the WCUs software it will automatically be taken care of. Also, a WCU comes configured with a set of modules. Usually you will probably want to update the module configurations as well but in case you wish not to, simply uncheck that check box. There are also situations where there are no module configurations for some modules and if you press “Add” you will be prompted about that. If you for some reason do care about that you can check the “Ignore non existent tools and configurations” check box.<br /> <br /> ==Modules for the WCU==<br /> A WCU can have a number of modules attached. This makes it possible to add new peripherals to the WCU for handling various tasks in acquiring measured data from a car. The nine types of modules are:<br /> # MCD-Hub<br /> # Canrecorder<br /> # GPS<br /> # IDC (Internal Diagnostic Client)<br /> # Uptime<br /> # State of Health<br /> # Signal Reader<br /> # RFE (Road Friction Estimation)<br /> # Blue piraT<br /> <br /> To deal with each tool's configuration a new view is presented below. To open this view, press the button “Modules” as shown in Illustration 33 on [[#The Vehicles Tab]].<br /> In the illustration above there are a set of tools present. Each type is grouped on the left side using a stack panel. Select the connected MCD-Hubs by selecting the MCD-Hub stack and select (click) the Canrecorder stack to see the canrecorders connected a so fourth.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration40.png|frame|Illustration 40: View for handling tool configurations.|center]]<br /> Each tool has its own entry in each of the stacks. In Illustration 40 above there is only one MCD-Hub present and it is “0”. Each tool is recognized with a tool ID which is set by the WCU. This ID is usually not descriptive and therefore you have the possibility to set a name of your likings. Change the name by pressing the button “Edit name”. You can also add a description to the tool that shows up as a “tool tip” when hovering over the name of the selected tool. Analogously, change the description by pressing the button “Edit tool description”. To reload the set of available tools for both MCD-Hub and Canrecorder, press the “Reload tools” button.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the MCD-Hub Module===<br /> The configuration for the MCD-Hub has only two settings. The first is the MCD-Hubs IP address and the second is the preferred firmware version. The other two configuration settings shown in Illustration 40 is “MCD-Hub firmware version” which shows the current version used by the hub and the second is “Last configuration update date” which states when the MCD-Hubs current configuration was brought into action.<br /> When you are done with your configuration you save it by pressing the “Save” button. If you for any reason need to reload the configuration, press the “Reload” button.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Canrecorder Module===<br /> The configuration for the Canrecorder is shown in Illustration 41 below. There are four fields of which two are editable. In order for the canrecorder to work you need to set the high- and low speed CAN bus. The update date says when the last configuration was enabled and the canrecorder version says which version of the canrecorder software is used.<br /> [[File:Illustration41.png|frame|Illustration 41: Configuration options for Canrecorder.|center]]<br /> <br /> ===Configure the GPS Module===<br /> There are four settings involved:<br /> <br /> # Enable GPS. Sets whether the GPS should be enabled or not. If you disable the GPS all the other settings will also be disabled.<br /> # GPS sampling interval. Sets the position sampling interval in seconds.<br /> # GPS monitor enabled. If this setting is enabled the WCU will continuously send its GPS position to the portal enabling real-time monitoring of the whereabouts of the WCU.<br /> # GPS monitor interval. Set how often the position will be updated. The interval is in seconds.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the IDC Module===<br /> [[File:Illustration42.png|frame|Illustration 42: Settings for the Internal Diagnostic Client (IDC).|center]]<br /> The IDC can be configured with which bus to communicate on given its assignment. You can actually even choose both where it will first try the Ethernet network (ETH), if it exists, and the CAN bus. If the car type in question does not have an Ethernet network, only the CAN option will appear.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Up-time Module===<br /> [[File:Illustration43.png|frame|Illustration 43: Settings for the Up-time module.|right]]<br /> The module is used to report how much and how long the WCU is running. First of all you can enable/disable the functionality all together with the “Enabled” check box. Next is how often the up-time should be logged in seconds. The second check box, “Monitor enabled” is used when you would like the module to report its up-time in real-time and the interval for that, also in seconds.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the State of Health Module===<br /> The state of health model has the same settings as the IDC module above.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Signal Reader Module===<br /> As of version 2.33 of the WCU software it is possible to monitor signals in real time.<br /> For this to happen you must enable the feature by checking the box “Enable monitor”. It is currently set at an update rate of once every second.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the RFE Module===<br /> From version 2.35 of the portal there is a possibility to upload up to three files to configure the RFE module. The three files are:<br /> # Configuration file<br /> # Certificate file<br /> # Binary file<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration44.png|frame|Illustration 44: Settings for the RFE module.|center]]<br /> <br /> === Configure the Blue piraT Module ===<br /> As of version 2.44 of the WICE portal it is possible to create blue piraT assignments. The blue piraT tool only has one configuration, the debug level, which determines the level of logging during the execution of the blue piraT assignments.<br /> <br /> ==The Administration Tab==<br /> This tab is a collection of the administrative tasks available in the portal. These are “Connect car to WCU”, “Archives”, “GDS/SDDB file”, “Resource Groups” and “Users”.<br /> <br /> ===Connect Car to WCU tab===<br /> To archive which car a specific WCU was in at the time an assignment was run can be done by connecting a car to a WCU in this tab. This is usually done automatically but in some situations it is necessary to do this manually<br /> <br /> The area is divided into two tables, one for searching WCUs, the left one, and one for searching cars, the right one. When you start typing the name of the WCU you are looking for in the upper left corner just above the table, matching WCUs appear in the left table. To find the car you are looking for, you do the same in the right table but here you have the option of using either the VIN or plate number.<br /> <br /> To connect a WCU with a car you drag the WCU you would like to connect onto the car in the right table. When you drop it onto a car a small icon will show signifying that the WCU and car are connected. <br /> <br /> From version 2.42 it is also possible to select a WCU and a Car and then click on the new "Connect" button located between the two grids.<br /> <br /> To disconnect a WCU and car you simply press the icon for wither of the WCU or car.<br /> See Illustration 45 below for an example.<br /> <br /> The connection is a sort of instantaneous carbon copy of the situation at the time that a task was created. If you later change the connection, already running/run tasks will not be affected.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration45.png|frame|Illustration 45: The connect Car to WCU tab.|center]]<br /> <br /> ===The User Administration Tab===<br /> The basic layout of the areas is just the same here as before. At the top you have a search area, in the middle is a result are and at the bottom are a set of buttons. The tab with a set of example users is in Illustration 46 below.<br /> The eight columns are:<br /> [[File:Illustration46.png|frame|none|left|Illustration 46: The user administration tab.]]<br /> <br /> * '''User ID'''. The unique ID that the user must enter when logging in.<br /> * '''Name'''. The name of the user.<br /> * '''Roles'''. Depending on which roles the user has to, he/she have different privileges. The roles are non-overlapping, i.e. being an “Admin” does not necessarily mean that you can do everything a “User” can do.<br /> * '''Enabled'''. Tells whether the account is enabled or not.<br /> * '''Email Address'''. By registering an email address a user can receive notifications via email from a WCU when certain event occurs.<br /> * '''Last login date'''. The date when the user last logged in.<br /> * '''Two factor auth'''. Whether the two-factor authentication is turned on for a particular user.<br /> * '''Logged in'''. You can see if the user is currently logged in.<br /> <br /> At the bottom there are eight buttons. They are:<br /> # The “New” button brings up the “New User” dialog which adds a new user to the portal<br /> # The “Edit” button brings up the “Edit User” dialog<br /> # The “Change Password” button brings up a dialog to change a user's password.<br /> # The “Create new secret” button. Pressing this generates a new cryptographic salt to be used when generating one-time passwords. If you do this for a user without enabling the possibility to see the secret on the next login, renders the user unable to login to the portal. No dialog is opened, simply a message saying that a new one has been generated is shown.<br /> # The “Show secret” button. Shows a dialog with the cryptographic salt shown in clear text as well as the QR-code, more on this later.<br /> # Edit roles and permissions<br /> # The “Save headers” button. Saves the headers and their order to be used as default on later logins.<br /> # Video. Start a video conversations with another user of the portal. You must have the software “Confero” installed for this to work.<br /> <br /> ====The New User Dialog====<br /> [[File:Illustration47.png|frame|Illustration 47: The New User Dialog]]<br /> By pressing the “New User” button the dialog in Illustration 47 below appears. Mandatory fields are User ID and the two password fields. Remember that the User ID must be unique and you will be notified if it is not. Click the “Add” button to add the user or change you mind by clicking “Cancel”.<br /> <br /> ====The Edit User Dialog====<br /> You can at any time modify a user by pressing the “Modify” button to bring up the dialog in Illustration 48 below. The User ID cannot be changed. A disabled account can not be used for logging onto the portal even if the correct user name and password are given. To modify the user roles, select or deselect a role by using the check boxes. To turn on two-factor authentication for a user, check the appropriate box. When you are satisfied with your modifications, press the “Save” button to make them permanent on the portal or press the “Cancel” button if you change your mind.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration48.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 48: The modify user dialog.]]<br /> <br /> To enable two factor authentication, tick the check box “Enable two factor authentication”. This will force the user to add another special one time password in addition to the account password when logging into the portal. The one time password is generated by a program on either your computer or if you want to you can install it on your smart phone which is probably the best solution. The program that generates one time password is based on a cryptographic salt and the current time. The cryptographic salt is randomly generated by the portal and is individual for each user. A secret can at any time be regenerated for a user which will render the user unable to login if you do not tick the check box “Show the secret to the user on their next login”.<br /> <br /> ====The Change Password Dialog====<br /> [[File:Illustration49.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 49: The change password dialog.]]<br /> To change a user's password, press the “Change Password” button and the dialog in X Y will appear. It is pretty straight forward as you type in the new password in the “New password” entry and you need to confirm it by typing it again in the entry below it. If you are satisfied, click the “Change” button or the “Cancel” button if you decide not to change the password.<br /> <br /> ====The Show Secret Window====<br /> [[File:Illustration50.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 50: The QR-code window]]<br /> A QR-code is shown that can be transferred to a smart phone by simply starting the authenticator app, point it at the screen and let the phone read the QR-code. An example of such a QR-code can be seen in Illustration 50. If the application that is to be used as a password generator do not support QR codes, the secret is shown in clear text at the top.<br /> <br /> {{Roles and permissions}}<br /> ====Edit roles and permission====<br /> In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> <br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of two tables. The top table holds the roles and the bottom one hold the selected role's.<br /> <br /> <br clear="all"> <br /> [[File:Illustration51.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “New” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the button “Delete”. Role names must be unique. You can optionally add a description to the role. To edit a description for an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top the table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be list of resources that the permission applies to. Resource groups can also be selected as a resource. This means that the permission will be applied to those resources.<br /> <br /> Each permission can be edited, deleted and you can create new permissions. When a permission is selected the buttons for editing and deleting permissions will be enabled.<br /> <br /> '''Creating a new permission'''<br><br /> To create a new permission press the “New” button. It opens the following interaction depicted below.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration52.png|left|frame|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> A permission consists of five parts:<br /> # ''The resource type''. Which resource type should the permission apply to. Currently there are two resource types, WCU and Car.<br /> # ''Resource subtype''. Which subtype does the permission apply to. The set of subtypes currently is:<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type.<br /> ## '''Conf'''. The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> # ''Subtype type''. The above subtypes module, assignment and monitor uses this part of the permission as well. The reason is that these permissions is applied to the modules individually. In essence, you can have a permission to create IDC assignments but not MCD-Hub assignments as an example. Not all modules have assignments as well, and therefore, assignment and monitor types only has a subset of all modules. There is one last option, the All option. That option implies that the permission applies to all current and future subtype types.<br /> # ''Read/Write''. As the name tells it is a read/write control of the permission. As an example for a permission saying “wcu:assignment:mcdhub:write” means that a user is allowed to write assignments, i.e. create new assignments of MCD-Hub type. If this permission instead ends with read, it means the use can view such assignments, typically this applies to what is listed in the Search tab.<br /> <br /> '''Selection of actual resources to apply the permission to'''<br><br /> The last part of a permission is to select to which resources it will apply. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 52. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group.<br /> To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow.<br /> There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> <br /> When you are done, press the button “Save permission”. If you change your mind, press “Cancel” instead.<br /> <br /> '''Edit a permission'''<br><br /> To edit an already existing permission, select the permission and then press the “Edit” button. This will open an interaction similar to when creating a new permission, however, with the two topmost parts locked for editing, i.e. the selections resource type and resource subtype disabled.<br /> When you are done editing press “Save permission” to save the changes or press “Cancel” to undo.<br /> <br /> ===The GDS/SDDB File Tab===<br /> In order for the portal to be able to translate error codes into a human readable format, a GDS or SDDB file must be selected for a vehicle. The set of GDS/SDDB files to choose from is administered in this tab, see Illustration 53 below. <br /> [[File:Illustration53.png|left|frame|Illustration 53: The GDS/SDDB file view.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> To upload a new GDS/SDDB file, press upload new file and you will be presented with dialog where you select the file, sets an optional name (if no name is entered, the file name is used) and an optional comment. To upload a new file for an existing entry, press the edit file button and you will be presented with a dialog where you can upload a new file. To edit the comment or the name that should show up when select which GDS/SDDB file to use for a vehicle, simply double click the cell and edit directly in the table.<br /> <br /> ===The Resource Groups Tab===<br /> This tab is used to administer some parts of the creation and destruction of resource groups and more. The panel for administering the resource groups is depicted in Illustration 54, below. <br /> [[File:Illustration54.png|left|frame|Illustration 54: The resource groups panel.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> At the top is a search field to search for resource groups. Next are two tables, side by side. The left table lists the resource groups found depending on your search criteria. When a resource group is selected, the resources that are part of the resource group are shown in the right table. Next, the functionality of the buttons will be covered.<br /> <br /> ====Add and Remove Resource Groups====<br /> [[File:Illustration55.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 55: Add resource group dialog.]]<br /> To add a resource group you simply press the “New resource group” button and the following window will show. Type the name for the new resource and press “Create”. If you change your mind, press the “Cancel” button. Resource groups are global and writable and that means that names must be unique. The reason for this is that a resource group name takes on the form as both the resources car and WCU and those must be unique and therefore the resource groups must also be unique. One can, however, imagine situations where this must not be enforced but at the moment this is the case.<br /> <br /> To remove a resource group, press the “Remove resource group” button. Be aware that no warning is given if there are resources in the group when removing it.<br /> <br /> ====Manipulating Resources in a Resource Group====<br /> In the right hand table in Illustration 56 below, you see a set of resources for a resource group. <br /> [[File:Illustration56.png|left|frame|Illustration 56: Manipulating resources in a resource group.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> Here are both WCUs and cars part of the group. In addition to the type there is a column named “Synchronized”. That column only applies to WCUs. The use of this column is as follows. Assume you have a resource group consisting of 50 WCUs. Further, lets make a configuration change to that resource group. Depending on where the WCUs geographically are and how they are used the WCUs will be updated at different times. How do you you know when all WCUs are up to date in the resource group? You could check them individually in the “Vehicles” panel but that is not very elegant and time saving. Instead, just watch the “Synchronized” column for the WCUs. When a WCU is up to date with respect to the group configuration the column will read “true”. The value is updated each 30 seconds.<br /> <br /> You can remove individual resources from a group by selecting the resource and then press the “Remove resource” button.<br /> <br /> Yet another button remains and it is the button “Base Group on Resource”. When you add a WCU to a resource group in the “Vehicles” panel you have the option of not updating the WCU configuration to match the one of the resource group's, see Illustration 39 in [[#Resource Groups]]. Using this function it is possible to base the whole group on a WCU's configuration rather than the group's configuration.<br /> <br /> ===The WCU Status Tab===<br /> This view is supposed to be used as for supervising a set of vehicles. The supervision done in real time and the values for the set of vehicles are updated as soon as they arrive on the server from the different vehicles.<br /> <br /> The set of status information collected comprises three parts:<br /> <br /> '''General information:'''<br /> * Alive, a heart beat signal<br /> * Connectivity, what data rates are currently available to the vehicle.<br /> ** 3G<br /> ** 2G<br /> ** none<br /> * Cell Signal Quality (CSQ). Indicates the signal strength of the mobile modem. The values are between 0 – 31, the higher the value the better. The special value of 99 is designated an unknown or not even detectable signal.<br /> * GPS, simply a binary indicator of fix or no fix for the GPS.<br /> <br /> '''Data Storage Usage:'''<br><br /> This set of data informs how much collected data resides in the WCU for each type of data collector (module). Total data indicates how much of the total amount of data storage available is used. After that, each type of data collector is lined up.<br /> <br /> '''Data Collection Status:'''<br><br /> When modules collect data they go through a set of states when triggers starts, stops and other events occur. Currently, only such events for the signal reader module is available. An optional message accompanying the current state is shown in parenthesis.<br /> <br /> The screen is divided in two parts, on the left hand side is a table with search functionality for finding the vehicles of interest and on the right hand side is the monitored vehicles. To monitor a vehicles you search for it in the table and then drag and drop the vehicle on the right hand panel.<br /> <br /> A view of the panel is depicted in Illustration 57 below.<br /> [[File:Illustration57.png|left|frame|Illustration 57: The WCU Status tab.]]</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Roles_and_permissions&diff=780 Roles and permissions 2017-07-20T12:57:47Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>====Roles and permissions====</includeonly><br /> In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> [[File:Edit roles and permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of three tables. The top left table holds a list of the roles, the top right holds the user(s) for the selected role and the bottom one hold the selected role's permissions. Their size is adjustable and you can minimize them by clicking on the line between them.<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “Add role” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the red button next to it. When making a role you add a description and unique name. To edit an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top left table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions and the upper right table shows which users have that role. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be a list of resources and resource groups that the permission applies to.<br /> <br /> ====== '''Creating and editing roles and permissions''' ======<br /> [[File:Add permission.png|thumb|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> To create a new permission press the “Add permission” button. It opens the following interaction depicted in illustration 52.<br /> [[File:Editing permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 53: Editing assignment permissions]]<br /> # Selecting Which kind of permission you want. there are 8 different permissions 7 to give permissions to WCUs and one to give permission to all assignments(the assignment permission can not be modified).The different assignments for WCUs are:<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Configuration.''' The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type. Now the permission is actually created but it can be changed to your likings. Illustration 53 shows the dialog Where you edit the permission.<br /> # Choosing if the permission should be a read and/or write permission. One of these have to be selected or you will not be able to save changes.<br /> # Selecting which resources that apply to the permission. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 53. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group. To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow. There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> # Set which kind of assignments the permission applies to. It is automatically set to have all selected but you can unselect all and selecting other assignments. This option is only availible on the assignment, monitor and module permission.<br /> When you are done press "Save changes" or "Reset changes" if you want to revert the changes. You can always edit the permission by selecting it getting the same dialog and change it except that you can not change what type of assignment it is.<br /> <br /> ====== Changing a users roles and permissions ======<br /> You can change a users roles under in the edit user dialog if you press the button "Edit user roles". The edit user dialog then gets extended as two boxes appear, a left one with available roles and a right one with current roles. In the left one you can search the role(s) you want and drag them to the right box or press the button pointing right. With the two buttons at the bottom corner(the paper and clipboard ones) you can copy the names of the roles and also insert the names of roles to add them.<br /> <br /> You can also change a users permission to view tasks in the tasks tab. By right-clicking the permission(s) you want to change permissions one and going to "Permission" you will get the options "Show who can see assignment" and "Add who can see assignment". "Show who can see assignment" will open a window with a left and a right box where the left contains users without permission to view the assignment and the right conatins users who have permission. By moving users from the left to right and vice versa you can give or remove someones permission. You can also press the clibboard the the right bottom to copy the users who have permissions or add users by writing their name within parentheses. Users in the right box can be unselectable and that is if they have a role giving them the permission to view that assignment the only way to remove that is to remove that role from them. "Add who can see assignment" works the same way as "Show who can see assignment" except that the right box does not show users with permission so you can not remove permissions, this si so that with add you can add permissions for many assignments at the same time as the show can not show users from many assignments.<br /> [[File:Copy user assignment permissions.png|thumb|300x300px|Illustration 54: Copy user assignment permissions dialog]]<br /> You can also edit a users role by searching for user(s) and right clicking on them to get a window with different options. There are five different options where the three first can be used on multiple users at the same time while the bottom two can not.<br /> * "Add user assignment permissions to this user" will open the dialog shown in illustration 54. With this button you take a users assignment permissions and add them to the selected user(s). You do this by searching and selecting a user and then pressing "OK".<br /> * "Replace user assignment permissions with user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button i much like the one before except that instead of adding permissions to the current this replaces the permissions that the selected user(s) have. Here you also search the user whose permissions you want to replace the select them and press "OK".<br /> * "Copy user roles to this user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button instead of replacing permissions replace selected user(s) roles with the roles of a user who you chose. Search the user whose roles you want to copy for replacement and press "OK".[[File:Give permission on car.png|thumb|Illustration 55: Give permission on car dialog]]<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on Car" is quite self explanatory and is to give assignment permission on one or many cars. The dialog will look like illustration 55. In the left box you select cars and move them to the right to give permission on them, you can also as you see below the left box select a file with cars to easily select a set of cars. Then you select which types of assignments it should give permission to (leaving this empty will not give any permissions). You can also check the checkbox "Reset user permission" to replace the roles of the selected user instead of adding new to the current ones.<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on WCU" is identical to the previous button except that it applies to WCUs instead of Cars.<br /> {{DEFAULTSORT:Rolas and Permissions}}</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Roles_and_permissions&diff=779 Roles and permissions 2017-07-20T12:53:49Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>=== Roles and permissions===</includeonly><br /> In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> [[File:Edit roles and permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of three tables. The top left table holds a list of the roles, the top right holds the user(s) for the selected role and the bottom one hold the selected role's permissions. Their size is adjustable and you can minimize them by clicking on the line between them.<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “Add role” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the red button next to it. When making a role you add a description and unique name. To edit an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top left table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions and the upper right table shows which users have that role. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be a list of resources and resource groups that the permission applies to.<br /> <br /> ====== '''Creating and editing roles and permissions''' ======<br /> [[File:Add permission.png|thumb|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> To create a new permission press the “Add permission” button. It opens the following interaction depicted in illustration 52.<br /> [[File:Editing permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 53: Editing assignment permissions]]<br /> # Selecting Which kind of permission you want. there are 8 different permissions 7 to give permissions to WCUs and one to give permission to all assignments(the assignment permission can not be modified).The different assignments for WCUs are:<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Configuration.''' The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type. Now the permission is actually created but it can be changed to your likings. Illustration 53 shows the dialog Where you edit the permission.<br /> # Choosing if the permission should be a read and/or write permission. One of these have to be selected or you will not be able to save changes.<br /> # Selecting which resources that apply to the permission. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 53. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group. To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow. There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> # Set which kind of assignments the permission applies to. It is automatically set to have all selected but you can unselect all and selecting other assignments. This option is only availible on the assignment, monitor and module permission.<br /> When you are done press "Save changes" or "Reset changes" if you want to revert the changes. You can always edit the permission by selecting it getting the same dialog and change it except that you can not change what type of assignment it is.<br /> <br /> ====== Changing a users roles and permissions ======<br /> You can change a users roles under in the edit user dialog if you press the button "Edit user roles". The edit user dialog then gets extended as two boxes appear, a left one with available roles and a right one with current roles. In the left one you can search the role(s) you want and drag them to the right box or press the button pointing right. With the two buttons at the bottom corner(the paper and clipboard ones) you can copy the names of the roles and also insert the names of roles to add them.<br /> <br /> You can also change a users permission to view tasks in the tasks tab. By right-clicking the permission(s) you want to change permissions one and going to "Permission" you will get the options "Show who can see assignment" and "Add who can see assignment". "Show who can see assignment" will open a window with a left and a right box where the left contains users without permission to view the assignment and the right conatins users who have permission. By moving users from the left to right and vice versa you can give or remove someones permission. You can also press the clibboard the the right bottom to copy the users who have permissions or add users by writing their name within parentheses. Users in the right box can be unselectable and that is if they have a role giving them the permission to view that assignment the only way to remove that is to remove that role from them. "Add who can see assignment" works the same way as "Show who can see assignment" except that the right box does not show users with permission so you can not remove permissions, this si so that with add you can add permissions for many assignments at the same time as the show can not show users from many assignments.<br /> [[File:Copy user assignment permissions.png|thumb|300x300px|Illustration 54: Copy user assignment permissions dialog]]<br /> You can also edit a users role by searching for user(s) and right clicking on them to get a window with different options. There are five different options where the three first can be used on multiple users at the same time while the bottom two can not.<br /> * "Add user assignment permissions to this user" will open the dialog shown in illustration 54. With this button you take a users assignment permissions and add them to the selected user(s). You do this by searching and selecting a user and then pressing "OK".<br /> * "Replace user assignment permissions with user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button i much like the one before except that instead of adding permissions to the current this replaces the permissions that the selected user(s) have. Here you also search the user whose permissions you want to replace the select them and press "OK".<br /> * "Copy user roles to this user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button instead of replacing permissions replace selected user(s) roles with the roles of a user who you chose. Search the user whose roles you want to copy for replacement and press "OK".[[File:Give permission on car.png|thumb|Illustration 55: Give permission on car dialog]]<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on Car" is quite self explanatory and is to give assignment permission on one or many cars. The dialog will look like illustration 55. In the left box you select cars and move them to the right to give permission on them, you can also as you see below the left box select a file with cars to easily select a set of cars. Then you select which types of assignments it should give permission to (leaving this empty will not give any permissions). You can also check the checkbox "Reset user permission" to replace the roles of the selected user instead of adding new to the current ones.<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on WCU" is identical to the previous button except that it applies to WCUs instead of Cars.<br /> {{DEFAULTSORT:Rolas and Permissions}}</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Roles_and_permissions&diff=778 Roles and permissions 2017-07-20T12:46:02Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>=== Roles and permissions===</includeonly><br /> In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> [[File:Edit roles and permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of three tables. The top left table holds a list of the roles, the top right holds the user(s) for the selected role and the bottom one hold the selected role's permissions. Their size is adjustable and you can minimize them by clicking on the line between them.<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “Add role” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the red button next to it. When making a role you add a description and unique name. To edit an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top left table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions and the upper right table shows which users have that role. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be a list of resources and resource groups that the permission applies to.<br /> <br /> === '''Creating and editing roles and permissions''' ===<br /> [[File:Add permission.png|thumb|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> To create a new permission press the “Add permission” button. It opens the following interaction depicted in illustration 52.<br /> [[File:Editing permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 53: Editing assignment permissions]]<br /> # Selecting Which kind of permission you want. there are 8 different permissions 7 to give permissions to WCUs and one to give permission to all assignments(the assignment permission can not be modified).The different assignments for WCUs are:<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Configuration.''' The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type. Now the permission is actually created but it can be changed to your likings. Illustration 53 shows the dialog Where you edit the permission.<br /> # Choosing if the permission should be a read and/or write permission. One of these have to be selected or you will not be able to save changes.<br /> # Selecting which resources that apply to the permission. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 53. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group. To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow. There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> # Set which kind of assignments the permission applies to. It is automatically set to have all selected but you can unselect all and selecting other assignments. This option is only availible on the assignment, monitor and module permission.<br /> When you are done press "Save changes" or "Reset changes" if you want to revert the changes. You can always edit the permission by selecting it getting the same dialog and change it except that you can not change what type of assignment it is.<br /> <br /> === Changing a users roles and permissions ===<br /> You can change a users roles under in the edit user dialog if you press the button "Edit user roles". The edit user dialog then gets extended as two boxes appear, a left one with available roles and a right one with current roles. In the left one you can search the role(s) you want and drag them to the right box or press the button pointing right. With the two buttons at the bottom corner(the paper and clipboard ones) you can copy the names of the roles and also insert the names of roles to add them.<br /> <br /> You can also change a users permission to view tasks in the tasks tab. By right-clicking the permission(s) you want to change permissions one and going to "Permission" you will get the options "Show who can see assignment" and "Add who can see assignment". "Show who can see assignment" will open a window with a left and a right box where the left contains users without permission to view the assignment and the right conatins users who have permission. By moving users from the left to right and vice versa you can give or remove someones permission. You can also press the clibboard the the right bottom to copy the users who have permissions or add users by writing their name within parentheses. Users in the right box can be unselectable and that is if they have a role giving them the permission to view that assignment the only way to remove that is to remove that role from them. "Add who can see assignment" works the same way as "Show who can see assignment" except that the right box does not show users with permission so you can not remove permissions, this si so that with add you can add permissions for many assignments at the same time as the show can not show users from many assignments.<br /> [[File:Copy user assignment permissions.png|thumb|300x300px|Illustration 54: Copy user assignment permissions dialog]]<br /> You can also edit a users role by searching for user(s) and right clicking on them to get a window with different options. There are five different options where the three first can be used on multiple users at the same time while the bottom two can not.<br /> * "Add user assignment permissions to this user" will open the dialog shown in illustration 54. With this button you take a users assignment permissions and add them to the selected user(s). You do this by searching and selecting a user and then pressing "OK".<br /> * "Replace user assignment permissions with user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button i much like the one before except that instead of adding permissions to the current this replaces the permissions that the selected user(s) have. Here you also search the user whose permissions you want to replace the select them and press "OK".<br /> * "Copy user roles to this user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button instead of replacing permissions replace selected user(s) roles with the roles of a user who you chose. Search the user whose roles you want to copy for replacement and press "OK".[[File:Give permission on car.png|thumb|Illustration 55: Give permission on car dialog]]<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on Car" is quite self explanatory and is to give assignment permission on one or many cars. The dialog will look like illustration 55. In the left box you select cars and move them to the right to give permission on them, you can also as you see below the left box select a file with cars to easily select a set of cars. Then you select which types of assignments it should give permission to (leaving this empty will not give any permissions). You can also check the checkbox "Reset user permission" to replace the roles of the selected user instead of adding new to the current ones.<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on WCU" is identical to the previous button except that it applies to WCUs instead of Cars.<br /> {{DEFAULTSORT:Rolas and Permissions}}</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&diff=777 The Portal Administrator View 2017-07-20T12:45:28Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>An administrator can do everything a user can do and more. In addition to the user, an administrator can create and modify users and stop assignments for any task. <br /> These new functions will be explained in the next 3 chapters.<br /> <br /> We will start with the search tab where two more buttons are visible. Next is the vehicles tab.<br /> Lastly is the administration tab with 5 sub tabs consisting of: the connect tab, the archives tab the<br /> GDS/SDDB files tab, the resource groups tab and the users tab.<br /> <br /> ==The Search Tab==<br /> [[File:Admin stop assigment.png|thumb|200x200px|Illustration 32a: Stop running assignment]]<br /> [[File:Admin force stop assignment.png|thumb|200x200px|Illustration 32b: Force stop assignment]]<br /> In addition to the functionality for an ordinary user, an administrator have one more button present. An administrator can send a force stop command to any WCU. <br /> <br /> Illustration 32a shows the "Stop assigment" button. This button is the same as for the ordinary user and is used to stop a running assignment. When a running assignment is stopped, it changes state to "Stop pending". This means that the portal is waiting for a stop message from the WCU before the state is changed to "Stopped" in the portal view. The administrator view exclusive "Force Stop Assignment" button, which can be seen in illustration 32b, forces a "Stop pending" assignment into "Stopped" state without waiting for the stop signal from the WCU. <br /> <br /> Also, the administrator can search and view any user's task.<br /> <br /> ==The Vehicles Tab==<br /> An administrator can do quite a many things in this view. Illustration 33 shows an example of this view. The table header along with the buttons “Edit Description” and “Get Log Files” are explained in the page for '''[[Vehicles]]'''. <br /> <br /> At the bottom you have a set of buttons to aid in handling the WCUs. To add a new WCU to the portal, the “New” buttons opens up a dialog for that. The “Get Log Files” button fetches log files for the selected WCU from the portal.<br /> <br /> [[File:42vehiclestab.png|none|left|frame|Illustration 33: The administrator's view in the WCUs tab.]]<br /> <br /> ===The New WCU Dialog===<br /> [[File:Illustration34.png|frame|Illustration 34: The Add New WCU Dialog.]]<br /> There are two ways that a WCU can enter the portal. The first is if you click the “New WCU” button and the second is the first time a WCU connects to the portal it registers itself. Ideally you will never have to add a WCU to the portal but just as a safety step you have the opportunity to add it yourself. When clicking the “New WCU” button the dialog in Illustration 34 opens up. You must enter the ID of the WCU as this is a unique identifier and you will be notified if the ID is already present on the portal. The description is optional but may be handy to remember which WCU it is.<br /> <br /> ===Edit the WCU Configuration===<br /> [[File:Wcu config1.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Modules.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config2.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Connection.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config3.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: WCU.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config4.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Power management.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu_config_wake_on_can.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Wake On CAN]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config5.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Upload.]]<br /> You can edit the configuration of the WCU from the portal. Simply click on '''Edit Configuration''' to open up the window in "Illustration: WCU Configuration: Modules". The WCU configuration window is divided into five tabs where each tab is described below. <br /> <br /> ====Modules====<br /> The set of check boxes for the different modules that are present is nine and are at the top. Check or uncheck these to tell the WCU if they are present or not. Doing so will speed up the boot process.<br /> <br /> To edit "Car type", click on the field where the car type is the displayed to open the "Edit car" dialog. This dialog is described in section [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog]]<br /> <br /> The last three check boxes, "Run IDC at boot", "Run IDC at ignition off" and "Enable VIN reader" is self-explanatory.<br /> <br /> ====Connection====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Connection" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Internet Service Provider (ISP)<br /> | Which ISP to use when multiple SIM cards are installed<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | WICE portal address<br /> | The server that the WCU should use for fetching new assignments etc.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | DRO Server<br /> | The server to connect to when doing a DRO.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> ====WCU====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: WCU" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Unit ID:<br /> | The ID cannot be changed from the portal. It can only be changed by logging on to the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Platform type:<br /> | The WCU platform type.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Platform subtype:<br /> | The WCU platform subtype.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | WCU software version:<br /> | This is the currenly used WCU software version.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Preferred WCU software:<br /> | This is the new preferred WCU software version to be installed.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Perform reset on update:<br /> | Removes all data on the WCU when installing a new WCU software.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | MX4 firmware version:<br /> | The currently used MX4 firmware version.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Preferred MX4 firmware:<br /> | The new preferred MX4 firmware.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> From version 2.40 of the WCU software, all WCUs report its platform type. The platform type determines, among other things, the number of available CAN buses in the IO tab. (see [[I/O configurations]]) Since a resource group is a collection of WCUs it has no platform type of its own to report. From version 2.41 of the portal the user has the option to set a fictive platform type for a resource group. This is also a prerequisite to also set the [[I/O configurations]] for a resource group. The platform type (and eventual subtype) is set in the WCU tab. If the resource group has members with other platform type(s) than the type that is about to be set, the user will get a warning.<br /> <br /> If the platform type of the resource group differs from the platform type of its members the I/O tab will be disabled. This is also the case when the platform type of the resource group and one member is the same but another member has another platform type.<br /> <br /> From version 2.42 it is possible to update the WCU root password. To update the password, write the new password in "Set root password" and save the configuration.<br /> <br /> ====Power Management====<br /> [[File:Periodic wake up time.png|thumb|frame|Illustration: Perodic wake-up]]<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Power management " and the tab content is described below.<br /> <br /> “Power mode” has two settings, Sleep and cut-off. In cut-off the MCD-Hub is not powered up on boot, nor is the WCU woken up at regular intervals to report battery voltage, GPS position etc.<br /> <br /> In the other mode, sleep, some more settings are visible as shown in "Illustration: Wake On Can". <br /> You can select the WCU to remain unpowered by selecting "External cut-off". In addition, you may enable the WCus wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time”. The “Periodic run-time” determines how long time the WCU should be awake before going back to sleep. The “Periodic wake-up time” indicates the time for each new wake up cycle.<br /> <br /> From version 2.43 it is also possible to set power mode to "deep sleep" for WCUs running on platform MX4 T20/T30 and MX4 V61. The configuration is the same as for mode "sleep".<br /> <br /> '''Example: ''' <br /> A periodic run-time of 600 seconds means that the WCU will be alive for 600 seconds (10 minutes). A periodic wake-up time of 3600 seconds means that the WCU will start a new run-time (600 seconds in this case) every new hour. (3600 seconds = 60 min). The sleep time in each cycle is, for the general case, the wake-up time minus the run-time and in this example 3600 minus 600 = 3000 seconds (50 min).<br /> This example is illustrated in illustration "Perodic wake-up.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ====Upload====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Upload" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Mobile upload limit<br /> | Defines the maximum data size that should be transferred via the mobile network. If the data size is larger than that the WCU will wait until a connection to a local network can be established. The size is in Mbytes.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Post run grace timeout<br /> | The number of seconds to wait before communicating with the MCD-Hub and portal, if the ignition is turned off.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload timeout<br /> | The maximum number of seconds the WCU should upload data before stopping.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Erase error code<br /> | If turned on the error codes in the car will be reset.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload data at boot<br /> | Uploads data when the WCU boots up<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload data at ignition off<br /> | Uploads data when the car is turned off<br /> |}<br /> <gallery widths="150px" mode="nolines"><br /> File:Wcu config1.png|Illustration: Modules.<br /> File:Wcu config2.png|Illustration: Connection.<br /> File:Wcu config3.png|Illustration: WCU.<br /> File:Wcu config4.png|Illustration: Power Management.<br /> File:Wcu_config_wake_on_can.png|Illustration: Wake On CAN<br /> File:Wcu config5.png|Illustration: Upload.<br /> </gallery><br /> Version >= 2.41 of the portal has a new tab named I/O. You can read more about in [[I/O_configurations]].<br /> <br /> ===The Edit Car Dialog===<br /> [[File:Illustration37.png|frame|Illustration 37: Edit Car]]<br /> <br /> To edit the information about a car, press the “Edit Car” button. The dialog in Illustration 37 opens up.<br /> The entry you can not edit is the VIN entry. If you need to edit that you must instead create a new car.<br /> In order for the portal to be able to translate error codes into a human readable format, you must choose a diagnostic DB file to be used. It is important to select the correct one as the diagnostic error codes read out might be translated incorrectly or more probable, not at all. It is also important to select the right type of car using “Car type”. This controls the number of CAN buses and speeds and the number of Ethernet networks, if any, in the car. The “Active” check box controls whether the car should show up in tables and searches in general concerning cars. A car can never be removed as it has probably been involved in measurements but to recall an inactivated car you must actively select to view inactivated cars.<br /> <br /> It is possible to update several cars at once by selecting multiple cars and then press the “Edit Car” button. By doing this you can selectively make changes to attributes of all the selected cars at once. To do this, the dialog is extended as one can be seen in Illustration 38 below.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration38.png|frame|Illustration 38: Edit Car|center]]<br /> <br /> ===Upload a Car Import File===<br /> It is possible to import a file that describes a set of cars. It can consist of both new cars and cars already in the database but that might need to be updated with new information.<br /> A car import file consists of a comma separated file where each line describes a car. The first line of the file must look as follows:<br><br /> '''VIN,regNr,description,project,protoNumber,tsu,series'''<br /> <br /> There are seven attributes currently. When uploading the file you have a choice of modifying existing cars on the portal. If you do not check this box and there are cars that already exists, the import will fail.<br /> <br /> === Show or export SIM card ID ===<br /> The SIM card ID for a single WCU can be seen when right-clicking on a WCU in the Vehicles tab and selecting "Show info".<br /> <br /> SIM card ID's for one or multiple WCUs can also be exported as a csv file. Select the WCUs you are interested in (in the Vehicles tab) and press the button "Export SIM card info" located in the bottom row below the Vehicles grid. The downloaded file will contain five columns: WCU ID, WCU Name, RegNr (Plate nr), VIN and SIM Card ID. <br /> <br /> === Upload WCU file ===<br /> The WCU attributes 'WCU Name' and 'WCU Comment' can from version 2.43 of the portal be updated for multiple WCUs via a comma separated txt/xls/xlsx file. Click the "Upload WCU File" button to open up the import file to upload dialog.<br /> <br /> The uploaded file has the following requirements:<br /> * The file must have two mandatory columns with the names 'WCU ID' and 'WCU Name'.<br /> * Furthermore, an optional column named 'Comments' can be added. <br /> * The columns should be in said order.<br /> * The amount of columns on each row must match the amount of columns in the header. <br /> * The columns should be separated by using tab or by a comma.<br /> If there is a 'Comment' column and a blank comment on a row then the old comment, if any, for the specific WCU will be kept. <br /> <br /> To remove a comment from a WCU simply check the checkbox for erasing comments. Doing so will result in that empty comments in the uploaded file will erase current comments.<br /> <br /> ==Resource Groups==<br /> As described above in [[Vehicles#Resource Groups]], you can define a set of resource groups in order to easily handle large groups of resources collectively. An example is if you have 100<br /> WCUs in such a resource group and you would like to edit the configuration for all WCUs. Instead of having to open the configuration for each individual WCU, you simply open the configuration for the resource group, do your edits and when you press save, the configuration<br /> will be saved to all WCUs in one go. The resource groups are created in another panel which<br /> will be described later.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration39.png|frame|Illustration 39: Adding resources to a group.|left]]<br /> To add resources to a resource group you start by selecting the resources you are interested to add to a resource group. Resources already added to a resource group will render the corresponding add button disabled.<br /> <br /> When you are satisfied with your selection you press either the button “Add WCU(s) to resource group” or “Add car(s) to resource group”. Pressing any of those buttons will show the dialog to the left. The group box will list the available groups. If you know the name of the resource group you can type the name and as you type the box will show names that fit what you type.<br /> <br /> The three check boxes requires a deeper discussion of what the mean. Assume you have a resource group that has been used for some time. A new WCU enters the portal and you would like to add that WCU to your group. A common situation is that you would like that WCU to be configured that same way as the rest of the WCUs in the resource group. This is accomplished by checking “Update WCU configuration”. If this requires an update of the WCUs software it will automatically be taken care of. Also, a WCU comes configured with a set of modules. Usually you will probably want to update the module configurations as well but in case you wish not to, simply uncheck that check box. There are also situations where there are no module configurations for some modules and if you press “Add” you will be prompted about that. If you for some reason do care about that you can check the “Ignore non existent tools and configurations” check box.<br /> <br /> ==Modules for the WCU==<br /> A WCU can have a number of modules attached. This makes it possible to add new peripherals to the WCU for handling various tasks in acquiring measured data from a car. The nine types of modules are:<br /> # MCD-Hub<br /> # Canrecorder<br /> # GPS<br /> # IDC (Internal Diagnostic Client)<br /> # Uptime<br /> # State of Health<br /> # Signal Reader<br /> # RFE (Road Friction Estimation)<br /> # Blue piraT<br /> <br /> To deal with each tool's configuration a new view is presented below. To open this view, press the button “Modules” as shown in Illustration 33 on [[#The Vehicles Tab]].<br /> In the illustration above there are a set of tools present. Each type is grouped on the left side using a stack panel. Select the connected MCD-Hubs by selecting the MCD-Hub stack and select (click) the Canrecorder stack to see the canrecorders connected a so fourth.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration40.png|frame|Illustration 40: View for handling tool configurations.|center]]<br /> Each tool has its own entry in each of the stacks. In Illustration 40 above there is only one MCD-Hub present and it is “0”. Each tool is recognized with a tool ID which is set by the WCU. This ID is usually not descriptive and therefore you have the possibility to set a name of your likings. Change the name by pressing the button “Edit name”. You can also add a description to the tool that shows up as a “tool tip” when hovering over the name of the selected tool. Analogously, change the description by pressing the button “Edit tool description”. To reload the set of available tools for both MCD-Hub and Canrecorder, press the “Reload tools” button.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the MCD-Hub Module===<br /> The configuration for the MCD-Hub has only two settings. The first is the MCD-Hubs IP address and the second is the preferred firmware version. The other two configuration settings shown in Illustration 40 is “MCD-Hub firmware version” which shows the current version used by the hub and the second is “Last configuration update date” which states when the MCD-Hubs current configuration was brought into action.<br /> When you are done with your configuration you save it by pressing the “Save” button. If you for any reason need to reload the configuration, press the “Reload” button.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Canrecorder Module===<br /> The configuration for the Canrecorder is shown in Illustration 41 below. There are four fields of which two are editable. In order for the canrecorder to work you need to set the high- and low speed CAN bus. The update date says when the last configuration was enabled and the canrecorder version says which version of the canrecorder software is used.<br /> [[File:Illustration41.png|frame|Illustration 41: Configuration options for Canrecorder.|center]]<br /> <br /> ===Configure the GPS Module===<br /> There are four settings involved:<br /> <br /> # Enable GPS. Sets whether the GPS should be enabled or not. If you disable the GPS all the other settings will also be disabled.<br /> # GPS sampling interval. Sets the position sampling interval in seconds.<br /> # GPS monitor enabled. If this setting is enabled the WCU will continuously send its GPS position to the portal enabling real-time monitoring of the whereabouts of the WCU.<br /> # GPS monitor interval. Set how often the position will be updated. The interval is in seconds.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the IDC Module===<br /> [[File:Illustration42.png|frame|Illustration 42: Settings for the Internal Diagnostic Client (IDC).|center]]<br /> The IDC can be configured with which bus to communicate on given its assignment. You can actually even choose both where it will first try the Ethernet network (ETH), if it exists, and the CAN bus. If the car type in question does not have an Ethernet network, only the CAN option will appear.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Up-time Module===<br /> [[File:Illustration43.png|frame|Illustration 43: Settings for the Up-time module.|right]]<br /> The module is used to report how much and how long the WCU is running. First of all you can enable/disable the functionality all together with the “Enabled” check box. Next is how often the up-time should be logged in seconds. The second check box, “Monitor enabled” is used when you would like the module to report its up-time in real-time and the interval for that, also in seconds.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the State of Health Module===<br /> The state of health model has the same settings as the IDC module above.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Signal Reader Module===<br /> As of version 2.33 of the WCU software it is possible to monitor signals in real time.<br /> For this to happen you must enable the feature by checking the box “Enable monitor”. It is currently set at an update rate of once every second.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the RFE Module===<br /> From version 2.35 of the portal there is a possibility to upload up to three files to configure the RFE module. The three files are:<br /> # Configuration file<br /> # Certificate file<br /> # Binary file<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration44.png|frame|Illustration 44: Settings for the RFE module.|center]]<br /> <br /> === Configure the Blue piraT Module ===<br /> As of version 2.44 of the WICE portal it is possible to create blue piraT assignments. The blue piraT tool only has one configuration, the debug level, which determines the level of logging during the execution of the blue piraT assignments.<br /> <br /> ==The Administration Tab==<br /> This tab is a collection of the administrative tasks available in the portal. These are “Connect car to WCU”, “Archives”, “GDS/SDDB file”, “Resource Groups” and “Users”.<br /> <br /> ===Connect Car to WCU tab===<br /> To archive which car a specific WCU was in at the time an assignment was run can be done by connecting a car to a WCU in this tab. This is usually done automatically but in some situations it is necessary to do this manually<br /> <br /> The area is divided into two tables, one for searching WCUs, the left one, and one for searching cars, the right one. When you start typing the name of the WCU you are looking for in the upper left corner just above the table, matching WCUs appear in the left table. To find the car you are looking for, you do the same in the right table but here you have the option of using either the VIN or plate number.<br /> <br /> To connect a WCU with a car you drag the WCU you would like to connect onto the car in the right table. When you drop it onto a car a small icon will show signifying that the WCU and car are connected. <br /> <br /> From version 2.42 it is also possible to select a WCU and a Car and then click on the new "Connect" button located between the two grids.<br /> <br /> To disconnect a WCU and car you simply press the icon for wither of the WCU or car.<br /> See Illustration 45 below for an example.<br /> <br /> The connection is a sort of instantaneous carbon copy of the situation at the time that a task was created. If you later change the connection, already running/run tasks will not be affected.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration45.png|frame|Illustration 45: The connect Car to WCU tab.|center]]<br /> <br /> ===The User Administration Tab===<br /> The basic layout of the areas is just the same here as before. At the top you have a search area, in the middle is a result are and at the bottom are a set of buttons. The tab with a set of example users is in Illustration 46 below.<br /> The eight columns are:<br /> [[File:Illustration46.png|frame|none|left|Illustration 46: The user administration tab.]]<br /> <br /> * '''User ID'''. The unique ID that the user must enter when logging in.<br /> * '''Name'''. The name of the user.<br /> * '''Roles'''. Depending on which roles the user has to, he/she have different privileges. The roles are non-overlapping, i.e. being an “Admin” does not necessarily mean that you can do everything a “User” can do.<br /> * '''Enabled'''. Tells whether the account is enabled or not.<br /> * '''Email Address'''. By registering an email address a user can receive notifications via email from a WCU when certain event occurs.<br /> * '''Last login date'''. The date when the user last logged in.<br /> * '''Two factor auth'''. Whether the two-factor authentication is turned on for a particular user.<br /> * '''Logged in'''. You can see if the user is currently logged in.<br /> <br /> At the bottom there are eight buttons. They are:<br /> # The “New” button brings up the “New User” dialog which adds a new user to the portal<br /> # The “Edit” button brings up the “Edit User” dialog<br /> # The “Change Password” button brings up a dialog to change a user's password.<br /> # The “Create new secret” button. Pressing this generates a new cryptographic salt to be used when generating one-time passwords. If you do this for a user without enabling the possibility to see the secret on the next login, renders the user unable to login to the portal. No dialog is opened, simply a message saying that a new one has been generated is shown.<br /> # The “Show secret” button. Shows a dialog with the cryptographic salt shown in clear text as well as the QR-code, more on this later.<br /> # Edit roles and permissions<br /> # The “Save headers” button. Saves the headers and their order to be used as default on later logins.<br /> # Video. Start a video conversations with another user of the portal. You must have the software “Confero” installed for this to work.<br /> <br /> ====The New User Dialog====<br /> [[File:Illustration47.png|frame|Illustration 47: The New User Dialog]]<br /> By pressing the “New User” button the dialog in Illustration 47 below appears. Mandatory fields are User ID and the two password fields. Remember that the User ID must be unique and you will be notified if it is not. Click the “Add” button to add the user or change you mind by clicking “Cancel”.<br /> <br /> ====The Edit User Dialog====<br /> You can at any time modify a user by pressing the “Modify” button to bring up the dialog in Illustration 48 below. The User ID cannot be changed. A disabled account can not be used for logging onto the portal even if the correct user name and password are given. To modify the user roles, select or deselect a role by using the check boxes. To turn on two-factor authentication for a user, check the appropriate box. When you are satisfied with your modifications, press the “Save” button to make them permanent on the portal or press the “Cancel” button if you change your mind.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration48.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 48: The modify user dialog.]]<br /> <br /> To enable two factor authentication, tick the check box “Enable two factor authentication”. This will force the user to add another special one time password in addition to the account password when logging into the portal. The one time password is generated by a program on either your computer or if you want to you can install it on your smart phone which is probably the best solution. The program that generates one time password is based on a cryptographic salt and the current time. The cryptographic salt is randomly generated by the portal and is individual for each user. A secret can at any time be regenerated for a user which will render the user unable to login if you do not tick the check box “Show the secret to the user on their next login”.<br /> <br /> ====The Change Password Dialog====<br /> [[File:Illustration49.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 49: The change password dialog.]]<br /> To change a user's password, press the “Change Password” button and the dialog in X Y will appear. It is pretty straight forward as you type in the new password in the “New password” entry and you need to confirm it by typing it again in the entry below it. If you are satisfied, click the “Change” button or the “Cancel” button if you decide not to change the password.<br /> <br /> ====The Show Secret Window====<br /> [[File:Illustration50.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 50: The QR-code window]]<br /> A QR-code is shown that can be transferred to a smart phone by simply starting the authenticator app, point it at the screen and let the phone read the QR-code. An example of such a QR-code can be seen in Illustration 50. If the application that is to be used as a password generator do not support QR codes, the secret is shown in clear text at the top.<br /> <br /> {{: Roles and permissions}}<br /> ====Edit roles and permission====<br /> In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> <br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of two tables. The top table holds the roles and the bottom one hold the selected role's.<br /> <br /> <br clear="all"> <br /> [[File:Illustration51.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “New” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the button “Delete”. Role names must be unique. You can optionally add a description to the role. To edit a description for an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top the table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be list of resources that the permission applies to. Resource groups can also be selected as a resource. This means that the permission will be applied to those resources.<br /> <br /> Each permission can be edited, deleted and you can create new permissions. When a permission is selected the buttons for editing and deleting permissions will be enabled.<br /> <br /> '''Creating a new permission'''<br><br /> To create a new permission press the “New” button. It opens the following interaction depicted below.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration52.png|left|frame|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> A permission consists of five parts:<br /> # ''The resource type''. Which resource type should the permission apply to. Currently there are two resource types, WCU and Car.<br /> # ''Resource subtype''. Which subtype does the permission apply to. The set of subtypes currently is:<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type.<br /> ## '''Conf'''. The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> # ''Subtype type''. The above subtypes module, assignment and monitor uses this part of the permission as well. The reason is that these permissions is applied to the modules individually. In essence, you can have a permission to create IDC assignments but not MCD-Hub assignments as an example. Not all modules have assignments as well, and therefore, assignment and monitor types only has a subset of all modules. There is one last option, the All option. That option implies that the permission applies to all current and future subtype types.<br /> # ''Read/Write''. As the name tells it is a read/write control of the permission. As an example for a permission saying “wcu:assignment:mcdhub:write” means that a user is allowed to write assignments, i.e. create new assignments of MCD-Hub type. If this permission instead ends with read, it means the use can view such assignments, typically this applies to what is listed in the Search tab.<br /> <br /> '''Selection of actual resources to apply the permission to'''<br><br /> The last part of a permission is to select to which resources it will apply. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 52. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group.<br /> To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow.<br /> There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> <br /> When you are done, press the button “Save permission”. If you change your mind, press “Cancel” instead.<br /> <br /> '''Edit a permission'''<br><br /> To edit an already existing permission, select the permission and then press the “Edit” button. This will open an interaction similar to when creating a new permission, however, with the two topmost parts locked for editing, i.e. the selections resource type and resource subtype disabled.<br /> When you are done editing press “Save permission” to save the changes or press “Cancel” to undo.<br /> <br /> ===The GDS/SDDB File Tab===<br /> In order for the portal to be able to translate error codes into a human readable format, a GDS or SDDB file must be selected for a vehicle. The set of GDS/SDDB files to choose from is administered in this tab, see Illustration 53 below. <br /> [[File:Illustration53.png|left|frame|Illustration 53: The GDS/SDDB file view.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> To upload a new GDS/SDDB file, press upload new file and you will be presented with dialog where you select the file, sets an optional name (if no name is entered, the file name is used) and an optional comment. To upload a new file for an existing entry, press the edit file button and you will be presented with a dialog where you can upload a new file. To edit the comment or the name that should show up when select which GDS/SDDB file to use for a vehicle, simply double click the cell and edit directly in the table.<br /> <br /> ===The Resource Groups Tab===<br /> This tab is used to administer some parts of the creation and destruction of resource groups and more. The panel for administering the resource groups is depicted in Illustration 54, below. <br /> [[File:Illustration54.png|left|frame|Illustration 54: The resource groups panel.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> At the top is a search field to search for resource groups. Next are two tables, side by side. The left table lists the resource groups found depending on your search criteria. When a resource group is selected, the resources that are part of the resource group are shown in the right table. Next, the functionality of the buttons will be covered.<br /> <br /> ====Add and Remove Resource Groups====<br /> [[File:Illustration55.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 55: Add resource group dialog.]]<br /> To add a resource group you simply press the “New resource group” button and the following window will show. Type the name for the new resource and press “Create”. If you change your mind, press the “Cancel” button. Resource groups are global and writable and that means that names must be unique. The reason for this is that a resource group name takes on the form as both the resources car and WCU and those must be unique and therefore the resource groups must also be unique. One can, however, imagine situations where this must not be enforced but at the moment this is the case.<br /> <br /> To remove a resource group, press the “Remove resource group” button. Be aware that no warning is given if there are resources in the group when removing it.<br /> <br /> ====Manipulating Resources in a Resource Group====<br /> In the right hand table in Illustration 56 below, you see a set of resources for a resource group. <br /> [[File:Illustration56.png|left|frame|Illustration 56: Manipulating resources in a resource group.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> Here are both WCUs and cars part of the group. In addition to the type there is a column named “Synchronized”. That column only applies to WCUs. The use of this column is as follows. Assume you have a resource group consisting of 50 WCUs. Further, lets make a configuration change to that resource group. Depending on where the WCUs geographically are and how they are used the WCUs will be updated at different times. How do you you know when all WCUs are up to date in the resource group? You could check them individually in the “Vehicles” panel but that is not very elegant and time saving. Instead, just watch the “Synchronized” column for the WCUs. When a WCU is up to date with respect to the group configuration the column will read “true”. The value is updated each 30 seconds.<br /> <br /> You can remove individual resources from a group by selecting the resource and then press the “Remove resource” button.<br /> <br /> Yet another button remains and it is the button “Base Group on Resource”. When you add a WCU to a resource group in the “Vehicles” panel you have the option of not updating the WCU configuration to match the one of the resource group's, see Illustration 39 in [[#Resource Groups]]. Using this function it is possible to base the whole group on a WCU's configuration rather than the group's configuration.<br /> <br /> ===The WCU Status Tab===<br /> This view is supposed to be used as for supervising a set of vehicles. The supervision done in real time and the values for the set of vehicles are updated as soon as they arrive on the server from the different vehicles.<br /> <br /> The set of status information collected comprises three parts:<br /> <br /> '''General information:'''<br /> * Alive, a heart beat signal<br /> * Connectivity, what data rates are currently available to the vehicle.<br /> ** 3G<br /> ** 2G<br /> ** none<br /> * Cell Signal Quality (CSQ). Indicates the signal strength of the mobile modem. The values are between 0 – 31, the higher the value the better. The special value of 99 is designated an unknown or not even detectable signal.<br /> * GPS, simply a binary indicator of fix or no fix for the GPS.<br /> <br /> '''Data Storage Usage:'''<br><br /> This set of data informs how much collected data resides in the WCU for each type of data collector (module). Total data indicates how much of the total amount of data storage available is used. After that, each type of data collector is lined up.<br /> <br /> '''Data Collection Status:'''<br><br /> When modules collect data they go through a set of states when triggers starts, stops and other events occur. Currently, only such events for the signal reader module is available. An optional message accompanying the current state is shown in parenthesis.<br /> <br /> The screen is divided in two parts, on the left hand side is a table with search functionality for finding the vehicles of interest and on the right hand side is the monitored vehicles. To monitor a vehicles you search for it in the table and then drag and drop the vehicle on the right hand panel.<br /> <br /> A view of the panel is depicted in Illustration 57 below.<br /> [[File:Illustration57.png|left|frame|Illustration 57: The WCU Status tab.]]</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=The_Portal_Administrator_View&diff=776 The Portal Administrator View 2017-07-20T12:44:12Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>An administrator can do everything a user can do and more. In addition to the user, an administrator can create and modify users and stop assignments for any task. <br /> These new functions will be explained in the next 3 chapters.<br /> <br /> We will start with the search tab where two more buttons are visible. Next is the vehicles tab.<br /> Lastly is the administration tab with 5 sub tabs consisting of: the connect tab, the archives tab the<br /> GDS/SDDB files tab, the resource groups tab and the users tab.<br /> <br /> ==The Search Tab==<br /> [[File:Admin stop assigment.png|thumb|200x200px|Illustration 32a: Stop running assignment]]<br /> [[File:Admin force stop assignment.png|thumb|200x200px|Illustration 32b: Force stop assignment]]<br /> In addition to the functionality for an ordinary user, an administrator have one more button present. An administrator can send a force stop command to any WCU. <br /> <br /> Illustration 32a shows the "Stop assigment" button. This button is the same as for the ordinary user and is used to stop a running assignment. When a running assignment is stopped, it changes state to "Stop pending". This means that the portal is waiting for a stop message from the WCU before the state is changed to "Stopped" in the portal view. The administrator view exclusive "Force Stop Assignment" button, which can be seen in illustration 32b, forces a "Stop pending" assignment into "Stopped" state without waiting for the stop signal from the WCU. <br /> <br /> Also, the administrator can search and view any user's task.<br /> <br /> ==The Vehicles Tab==<br /> An administrator can do quite a many things in this view. Illustration 33 shows an example of this view. The table header along with the buttons “Edit Description” and “Get Log Files” are explained in the page for '''[[Vehicles]]'''. <br /> <br /> At the bottom you have a set of buttons to aid in handling the WCUs. To add a new WCU to the portal, the “New” buttons opens up a dialog for that. The “Get Log Files” button fetches log files for the selected WCU from the portal.<br /> <br /> [[File:42vehiclestab.png|none|left|frame|Illustration 33: The administrator's view in the WCUs tab.]]<br /> <br /> ===The New WCU Dialog===<br /> [[File:Illustration34.png|frame|Illustration 34: The Add New WCU Dialog.]]<br /> There are two ways that a WCU can enter the portal. The first is if you click the “New WCU” button and the second is the first time a WCU connects to the portal it registers itself. Ideally you will never have to add a WCU to the portal but just as a safety step you have the opportunity to add it yourself. When clicking the “New WCU” button the dialog in Illustration 34 opens up. You must enter the ID of the WCU as this is a unique identifier and you will be notified if the ID is already present on the portal. The description is optional but may be handy to remember which WCU it is.<br /> <br /> ===Edit the WCU Configuration===<br /> [[File:Wcu config1.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Modules.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config2.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Connection.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config3.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: WCU.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config4.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Power management.]]<br /> [[File:Wcu_config_wake_on_can.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Wake On CAN]]<br /> [[File:Wcu config5.png|150px|thumb|frame|Illustration: Upload.]]<br /> You can edit the configuration of the WCU from the portal. Simply click on '''Edit Configuration''' to open up the window in "Illustration: WCU Configuration: Modules". The WCU configuration window is divided into five tabs where each tab is described below. <br /> <br /> ====Modules====<br /> The set of check boxes for the different modules that are present is nine and are at the top. Check or uncheck these to tell the WCU if they are present or not. Doing so will speed up the boot process.<br /> <br /> To edit "Car type", click on the field where the car type is the displayed to open the "Edit car" dialog. This dialog is described in section [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog]]<br /> <br /> The last three check boxes, "Run IDC at boot", "Run IDC at ignition off" and "Enable VIN reader" is self-explanatory.<br /> <br /> ====Connection====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Connection" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Internet Service Provider (ISP)<br /> | Which ISP to use when multiple SIM cards are installed<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | WICE portal address<br /> | The server that the WCU should use for fetching new assignments etc.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | DRO Server<br /> | The server to connect to when doing a DRO.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> ====WCU====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: WCU" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Unit ID:<br /> | The ID cannot be changed from the portal. It can only be changed by logging on to the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Platform type:<br /> | The WCU platform type.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Platform subtype:<br /> | The WCU platform subtype.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | WCU software version:<br /> | This is the currenly used WCU software version.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Preferred WCU software:<br /> | This is the new preferred WCU software version to be installed.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Perform reset on update:<br /> | Removes all data on the WCU when installing a new WCU software.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | MX4 firmware version:<br /> | The currently used MX4 firmware version.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Preferred MX4 firmware:<br /> | The new preferred MX4 firmware.<br /> |}<br /> <br /> From version 2.40 of the WCU software, all WCUs report its platform type. The platform type determines, among other things, the number of available CAN buses in the IO tab. (see [[I/O configurations]]) Since a resource group is a collection of WCUs it has no platform type of its own to report. From version 2.41 of the portal the user has the option to set a fictive platform type for a resource group. This is also a prerequisite to also set the [[I/O configurations]] for a resource group. The platform type (and eventual subtype) is set in the WCU tab. If the resource group has members with other platform type(s) than the type that is about to be set, the user will get a warning.<br /> <br /> If the platform type of the resource group differs from the platform type of its members the I/O tab will be disabled. This is also the case when the platform type of the resource group and one member is the same but another member has another platform type.<br /> <br /> From version 2.42 it is possible to update the WCU root password. To update the password, write the new password in "Set root password" and save the configuration.<br /> <br /> ====Power Management====<br /> [[File:Periodic wake up time.png|thumb|frame|Illustration: Perodic wake-up]]<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Power management " and the tab content is described below.<br /> <br /> “Power mode” has two settings, Sleep and cut-off. In cut-off the MCD-Hub is not powered up on boot, nor is the WCU woken up at regular intervals to report battery voltage, GPS position etc.<br /> <br /> In the other mode, sleep, some more settings are visible as shown in "Illustration: Wake On Can". <br /> You can select the WCU to remain unpowered by selecting "External cut-off". In addition, you may enable the WCus wake-up functionality. This function is simply made up of a cycle time called “Periodic wake-up time” and the corresponding “Periodic run-time”. The “Periodic run-time” determines how long time the WCU should be awake before going back to sleep. The “Periodic wake-up time” indicates the time for each new wake up cycle.<br /> <br /> From version 2.43 it is also possible to set power mode to "deep sleep" for WCUs running on platform MX4 T20/T30 and MX4 V61. The configuration is the same as for mode "sleep".<br /> <br /> '''Example: ''' <br /> A periodic run-time of 600 seconds means that the WCU will be alive for 600 seconds (10 minutes). A periodic wake-up time of 3600 seconds means that the WCU will start a new run-time (600 seconds in this case) every new hour. (3600 seconds = 60 min). The sleep time in each cycle is, for the general case, the wake-up time minus the run-time and in this example 3600 minus 600 = 3000 seconds (50 min).<br /> This example is illustrated in illustration "Perodic wake-up.<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> ====Upload====<br /> This tab can be seen in "Illustration: Upload" and the tab content is described in the table below.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Mobile upload limit<br /> | Defines the maximum data size that should be transferred via the mobile network. If the data size is larger than that the WCU will wait until a connection to a local network can be established. The size is in Mbytes.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Post run grace timeout<br /> | The number of seconds to wait before communicating with the MCD-Hub and portal, if the ignition is turned off.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload timeout<br /> | The maximum number of seconds the WCU should upload data before stopping.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Erase error code<br /> | If turned on the error codes in the car will be reset.<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload data at boot<br /> | Uploads data when the WCU boots up<br /> |-<br /> | style="font-weight: bold;" | Upload data at ignition off<br /> | Uploads data when the car is turned off<br /> |}<br /> <gallery widths="150px" mode="nolines"><br /> File:Wcu config1.png|Illustration: Modules.<br /> File:Wcu config2.png|Illustration: Connection.<br /> File:Wcu config3.png|Illustration: WCU.<br /> File:Wcu config4.png|Illustration: Power Management.<br /> File:Wcu_config_wake_on_can.png|Illustration: Wake On CAN<br /> File:Wcu config5.png|Illustration: Upload.<br /> </gallery><br /> Version >= 2.41 of the portal has a new tab named I/O. You can read more about in [[I/O_configurations]].<br /> <br /> ===The Edit Car Dialog===<br /> [[File:Illustration37.png|frame|Illustration 37: Edit Car]]<br /> <br /> To edit the information about a car, press the “Edit Car” button. The dialog in Illustration 37 opens up.<br /> The entry you can not edit is the VIN entry. If you need to edit that you must instead create a new car.<br /> In order for the portal to be able to translate error codes into a human readable format, you must choose a diagnostic DB file to be used. It is important to select the correct one as the diagnostic error codes read out might be translated incorrectly or more probable, not at all. It is also important to select the right type of car using “Car type”. This controls the number of CAN buses and speeds and the number of Ethernet networks, if any, in the car. The “Active” check box controls whether the car should show up in tables and searches in general concerning cars. A car can never be removed as it has probably been involved in measurements but to recall an inactivated car you must actively select to view inactivated cars.<br /> <br /> It is possible to update several cars at once by selecting multiple cars and then press the “Edit Car” button. By doing this you can selectively make changes to attributes of all the selected cars at once. To do this, the dialog is extended as one can be seen in Illustration 38 below.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration38.png|frame|Illustration 38: Edit Car|center]]<br /> <br /> ===Upload a Car Import File===<br /> It is possible to import a file that describes a set of cars. It can consist of both new cars and cars already in the database but that might need to be updated with new information.<br /> A car import file consists of a comma separated file where each line describes a car. The first line of the file must look as follows:<br><br /> '''VIN,regNr,description,project,protoNumber,tsu,series'''<br /> <br /> There are seven attributes currently. When uploading the file you have a choice of modifying existing cars on the portal. If you do not check this box and there are cars that already exists, the import will fail.<br /> <br /> === Show or export SIM card ID ===<br /> The SIM card ID for a single WCU can be seen when right-clicking on a WCU in the Vehicles tab and selecting "Show info".<br /> <br /> SIM card ID's for one or multiple WCUs can also be exported as a csv file. Select the WCUs you are interested in (in the Vehicles tab) and press the button "Export SIM card info" located in the bottom row below the Vehicles grid. The downloaded file will contain five columns: WCU ID, WCU Name, RegNr (Plate nr), VIN and SIM Card ID. <br /> <br /> === Upload WCU file ===<br /> The WCU attributes 'WCU Name' and 'WCU Comment' can from version 2.43 of the portal be updated for multiple WCUs via a comma separated txt/xls/xlsx file. Click the "Upload WCU File" button to open up the import file to upload dialog.<br /> <br /> The uploaded file has the following requirements:<br /> * The file must have two mandatory columns with the names 'WCU ID' and 'WCU Name'.<br /> * Furthermore, an optional column named 'Comments' can be added. <br /> * The columns should be in said order.<br /> * The amount of columns on each row must match the amount of columns in the header. <br /> * The columns should be separated by using tab or by a comma.<br /> If there is a 'Comment' column and a blank comment on a row then the old comment, if any, for the specific WCU will be kept. <br /> <br /> To remove a comment from a WCU simply check the checkbox for erasing comments. Doing so will result in that empty comments in the uploaded file will erase current comments.<br /> <br /> ==Resource Groups==<br /> As described above in [[Vehicles#Resource Groups]], you can define a set of resource groups in order to easily handle large groups of resources collectively. An example is if you have 100<br /> WCUs in such a resource group and you would like to edit the configuration for all WCUs. Instead of having to open the configuration for each individual WCU, you simply open the configuration for the resource group, do your edits and when you press save, the configuration<br /> will be saved to all WCUs in one go. The resource groups are created in another panel which<br /> will be described later.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration39.png|frame|Illustration 39: Adding resources to a group.|left]]<br /> To add resources to a resource group you start by selecting the resources you are interested to add to a resource group. Resources already added to a resource group will render the corresponding add button disabled.<br /> <br /> When you are satisfied with your selection you press either the button “Add WCU(s) to resource group” or “Add car(s) to resource group”. Pressing any of those buttons will show the dialog to the left. The group box will list the available groups. If you know the name of the resource group you can type the name and as you type the box will show names that fit what you type.<br /> <br /> The three check boxes requires a deeper discussion of what the mean. Assume you have a resource group that has been used for some time. A new WCU enters the portal and you would like to add that WCU to your group. A common situation is that you would like that WCU to be configured that same way as the rest of the WCUs in the resource group. This is accomplished by checking “Update WCU configuration”. If this requires an update of the WCUs software it will automatically be taken care of. Also, a WCU comes configured with a set of modules. Usually you will probably want to update the module configurations as well but in case you wish not to, simply uncheck that check box. There are also situations where there are no module configurations for some modules and if you press “Add” you will be prompted about that. If you for some reason do care about that you can check the “Ignore non existent tools and configurations” check box.<br /> <br /> ==Modules for the WCU==<br /> A WCU can have a number of modules attached. This makes it possible to add new peripherals to the WCU for handling various tasks in acquiring measured data from a car. The nine types of modules are:<br /> # MCD-Hub<br /> # Canrecorder<br /> # GPS<br /> # IDC (Internal Diagnostic Client)<br /> # Uptime<br /> # State of Health<br /> # Signal Reader<br /> # RFE (Road Friction Estimation)<br /> # Blue piraT<br /> <br /> To deal with each tool's configuration a new view is presented below. To open this view, press the button “Modules” as shown in Illustration 33 on [[#The Vehicles Tab]].<br /> In the illustration above there are a set of tools present. Each type is grouped on the left side using a stack panel. Select the connected MCD-Hubs by selecting the MCD-Hub stack and select (click) the Canrecorder stack to see the canrecorders connected a so fourth.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration40.png|frame|Illustration 40: View for handling tool configurations.|center]]<br /> Each tool has its own entry in each of the stacks. In Illustration 40 above there is only one MCD-Hub present and it is “0”. Each tool is recognized with a tool ID which is set by the WCU. This ID is usually not descriptive and therefore you have the possibility to set a name of your likings. Change the name by pressing the button “Edit name”. You can also add a description to the tool that shows up as a “tool tip” when hovering over the name of the selected tool. Analogously, change the description by pressing the button “Edit tool description”. To reload the set of available tools for both MCD-Hub and Canrecorder, press the “Reload tools” button.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the MCD-Hub Module===<br /> The configuration for the MCD-Hub has only two settings. The first is the MCD-Hubs IP address and the second is the preferred firmware version. The other two configuration settings shown in Illustration 40 is “MCD-Hub firmware version” which shows the current version used by the hub and the second is “Last configuration update date” which states when the MCD-Hubs current configuration was brought into action.<br /> When you are done with your configuration you save it by pressing the “Save” button. If you for any reason need to reload the configuration, press the “Reload” button.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Canrecorder Module===<br /> The configuration for the Canrecorder is shown in Illustration 41 below. There are four fields of which two are editable. In order for the canrecorder to work you need to set the high- and low speed CAN bus. The update date says when the last configuration was enabled and the canrecorder version says which version of the canrecorder software is used.<br /> [[File:Illustration41.png|frame|Illustration 41: Configuration options for Canrecorder.|center]]<br /> <br /> ===Configure the GPS Module===<br /> There are four settings involved:<br /> <br /> # Enable GPS. Sets whether the GPS should be enabled or not. If you disable the GPS all the other settings will also be disabled.<br /> # GPS sampling interval. Sets the position sampling interval in seconds.<br /> # GPS monitor enabled. If this setting is enabled the WCU will continuously send its GPS position to the portal enabling real-time monitoring of the whereabouts of the WCU.<br /> # GPS monitor interval. Set how often the position will be updated. The interval is in seconds.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the IDC Module===<br /> [[File:Illustration42.png|frame|Illustration 42: Settings for the Internal Diagnostic Client (IDC).|center]]<br /> The IDC can be configured with which bus to communicate on given its assignment. You can actually even choose both where it will first try the Ethernet network (ETH), if it exists, and the CAN bus. If the car type in question does not have an Ethernet network, only the CAN option will appear.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Up-time Module===<br /> [[File:Illustration43.png|frame|Illustration 43: Settings for the Up-time module.|right]]<br /> The module is used to report how much and how long the WCU is running. First of all you can enable/disable the functionality all together with the “Enabled” check box. Next is how often the up-time should be logged in seconds. The second check box, “Monitor enabled” is used when you would like the module to report its up-time in real-time and the interval for that, also in seconds.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the State of Health Module===<br /> The state of health model has the same settings as the IDC module above.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the Signal Reader Module===<br /> As of version 2.33 of the WCU software it is possible to monitor signals in real time.<br /> For this to happen you must enable the feature by checking the box “Enable monitor”. It is currently set at an update rate of once every second.<br /> <br /> ===Configure the RFE Module===<br /> From version 2.35 of the portal there is a possibility to upload up to three files to configure the RFE module. The three files are:<br /> # Configuration file<br /> # Certificate file<br /> # Binary file<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration44.png|frame|Illustration 44: Settings for the RFE module.|center]]<br /> <br /> === Configure the Blue piraT Module ===<br /> As of version 2.44 of the WICE portal it is possible to create blue piraT assignments. The blue piraT tool only has one configuration, the debug level, which determines the level of logging during the execution of the blue piraT assignments.<br /> <br /> ==The Administration Tab==<br /> This tab is a collection of the administrative tasks available in the portal. These are “Connect car to WCU”, “Archives”, “GDS/SDDB file”, “Resource Groups” and “Users”.<br /> <br /> ===Connect Car to WCU tab===<br /> To archive which car a specific WCU was in at the time an assignment was run can be done by connecting a car to a WCU in this tab. This is usually done automatically but in some situations it is necessary to do this manually<br /> <br /> The area is divided into two tables, one for searching WCUs, the left one, and one for searching cars, the right one. When you start typing the name of the WCU you are looking for in the upper left corner just above the table, matching WCUs appear in the left table. To find the car you are looking for, you do the same in the right table but here you have the option of using either the VIN or plate number.<br /> <br /> To connect a WCU with a car you drag the WCU you would like to connect onto the car in the right table. When you drop it onto a car a small icon will show signifying that the WCU and car are connected. <br /> <br /> From version 2.42 it is also possible to select a WCU and a Car and then click on the new "Connect" button located between the two grids.<br /> <br /> To disconnect a WCU and car you simply press the icon for wither of the WCU or car.<br /> See Illustration 45 below for an example.<br /> <br /> The connection is a sort of instantaneous carbon copy of the situation at the time that a task was created. If you later change the connection, already running/run tasks will not be affected.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration45.png|frame|Illustration 45: The connect Car to WCU tab.|center]]<br /> <br /> ===The User Administration Tab===<br /> The basic layout of the areas is just the same here as before. At the top you have a search area, in the middle is a result are and at the bottom are a set of buttons. The tab with a set of example users is in Illustration 46 below.<br /> The eight columns are:<br /> [[File:Illustration46.png|frame|none|left|Illustration 46: The user administration tab.]]<br /> <br /> * '''User ID'''. The unique ID that the user must enter when logging in.<br /> * '''Name'''. The name of the user.<br /> * '''Roles'''. Depending on which roles the user has to, he/she have different privileges. The roles are non-overlapping, i.e. being an “Admin” does not necessarily mean that you can do everything a “User” can do.<br /> * '''Enabled'''. Tells whether the account is enabled or not.<br /> * '''Email Address'''. By registering an email address a user can receive notifications via email from a WCU when certain event occurs.<br /> * '''Last login date'''. The date when the user last logged in.<br /> * '''Two factor auth'''. Whether the two-factor authentication is turned on for a particular user.<br /> * '''Logged in'''. You can see if the user is currently logged in.<br /> <br /> At the bottom there are eight buttons. They are:<br /> # The “New” button brings up the “New User” dialog which adds a new user to the portal<br /> # The “Edit” button brings up the “Edit User” dialog<br /> # The “Change Password” button brings up a dialog to change a user's password.<br /> # The “Create new secret” button. Pressing this generates a new cryptographic salt to be used when generating one-time passwords. If you do this for a user without enabling the possibility to see the secret on the next login, renders the user unable to login to the portal. No dialog is opened, simply a message saying that a new one has been generated is shown.<br /> # The “Show secret” button. Shows a dialog with the cryptographic salt shown in clear text as well as the QR-code, more on this later.<br /> # Edit roles and permissions<br /> # The “Save headers” button. Saves the headers and their order to be used as default on later logins.<br /> # Video. Start a video conversations with another user of the portal. You must have the software “Confero” installed for this to work.<br /> <br /> ====The New User Dialog====<br /> [[File:Illustration47.png|frame|Illustration 47: The New User Dialog]]<br /> By pressing the “New User” button the dialog in Illustration 47 below appears. Mandatory fields are User ID and the two password fields. Remember that the User ID must be unique and you will be notified if it is not. Click the “Add” button to add the user or change you mind by clicking “Cancel”.<br /> <br /> ====The Edit User Dialog====<br /> You can at any time modify a user by pressing the “Modify” button to bring up the dialog in Illustration 48 below. The User ID cannot be changed. A disabled account can not be used for logging onto the portal even if the correct user name and password are given. To modify the user roles, select or deselect a role by using the check boxes. To turn on two-factor authentication for a user, check the appropriate box. When you are satisfied with your modifications, press the “Save” button to make them permanent on the portal or press the “Cancel” button if you change your mind.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration48.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 48: The modify user dialog.]]<br /> <br /> To enable two factor authentication, tick the check box “Enable two factor authentication”. This will force the user to add another special one time password in addition to the account password when logging into the portal. The one time password is generated by a program on either your computer or if you want to you can install it on your smart phone which is probably the best solution. The program that generates one time password is based on a cryptographic salt and the current time. The cryptographic salt is randomly generated by the portal and is individual for each user. A secret can at any time be regenerated for a user which will render the user unable to login if you do not tick the check box “Show the secret to the user on their next login”.<br /> <br /> ====The Change Password Dialog====<br /> [[File:Illustration49.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 49: The change password dialog.]]<br /> To change a user's password, press the “Change Password” button and the dialog in X Y will appear. It is pretty straight forward as you type in the new password in the “New password” entry and you need to confirm it by typing it again in the entry below it. If you are satisfied, click the “Change” button or the “Cancel” button if you decide not to change the password.<br /> <br /> ====The Show Secret Window====<br /> [[File:Illustration50.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 50: The QR-code window]]<br /> A QR-code is shown that can be transferred to a smart phone by simply starting the authenticator app, point it at the screen and let the phone read the QR-code. An example of such a QR-code can be seen in Illustration 50. If the application that is to be used as a password generator do not support QR codes, the secret is shown in clear text at the top.<br /> {{: Roles and Permissions}}<br /> ====Edit roles and permission====<br /> In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> <br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of two tables. The top table holds the roles and the bottom one hold the selected role's.<br /> <br /> <br clear="all"> <br /> [[File:Illustration51.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “New” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the button “Delete”. Role names must be unique. You can optionally add a description to the role. To edit a description for an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top the table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be list of resources that the permission applies to. Resource groups can also be selected as a resource. This means that the permission will be applied to those resources.<br /> <br /> Each permission can be edited, deleted and you can create new permissions. When a permission is selected the buttons for editing and deleting permissions will be enabled.<br /> <br /> '''Creating a new permission'''<br><br /> To create a new permission press the “New” button. It opens the following interaction depicted below.<br /> <br /> [[File:Illustration52.png|left|frame|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> A permission consists of five parts:<br /> # ''The resource type''. Which resource type should the permission apply to. Currently there are two resource types, WCU and Car.<br /> # ''Resource subtype''. Which subtype does the permission apply to. The set of subtypes currently is:<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type.<br /> ## '''Conf'''. The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> # ''Subtype type''. The above subtypes module, assignment and monitor uses this part of the permission as well. The reason is that these permissions is applied to the modules individually. In essence, you can have a permission to create IDC assignments but not MCD-Hub assignments as an example. Not all modules have assignments as well, and therefore, assignment and monitor types only has a subset of all modules. There is one last option, the All option. That option implies that the permission applies to all current and future subtype types.<br /> # ''Read/Write''. As the name tells it is a read/write control of the permission. As an example for a permission saying “wcu:assignment:mcdhub:write” means that a user is allowed to write assignments, i.e. create new assignments of MCD-Hub type. If this permission instead ends with read, it means the use can view such assignments, typically this applies to what is listed in the Search tab.<br /> <br /> '''Selection of actual resources to apply the permission to'''<br><br /> The last part of a permission is to select to which resources it will apply. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 52. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group.<br /> To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow.<br /> There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> <br /> When you are done, press the button “Save permission”. If you change your mind, press “Cancel” instead.<br /> <br /> '''Edit a permission'''<br><br /> To edit an already existing permission, select the permission and then press the “Edit” button. This will open an interaction similar to when creating a new permission, however, with the two topmost parts locked for editing, i.e. the selections resource type and resource subtype disabled.<br /> When you are done editing press “Save permission” to save the changes or press “Cancel” to undo.<br /> <br /> ===The GDS/SDDB File Tab===<br /> In order for the portal to be able to translate error codes into a human readable format, a GDS or SDDB file must be selected for a vehicle. The set of GDS/SDDB files to choose from is administered in this tab, see Illustration 53 below. <br /> [[File:Illustration53.png|left|frame|Illustration 53: The GDS/SDDB file view.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> To upload a new GDS/SDDB file, press upload new file and you will be presented with dialog where you select the file, sets an optional name (if no name is entered, the file name is used) and an optional comment. To upload a new file for an existing entry, press the edit file button and you will be presented with a dialog where you can upload a new file. To edit the comment or the name that should show up when select which GDS/SDDB file to use for a vehicle, simply double click the cell and edit directly in the table.<br /> <br /> ===The Resource Groups Tab===<br /> This tab is used to administer some parts of the creation and destruction of resource groups and more. The panel for administering the resource groups is depicted in Illustration 54, below. <br /> [[File:Illustration54.png|left|frame|Illustration 54: The resource groups panel.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> At the top is a search field to search for resource groups. Next are two tables, side by side. The left table lists the resource groups found depending on your search criteria. When a resource group is selected, the resources that are part of the resource group are shown in the right table. Next, the functionality of the buttons will be covered.<br /> <br /> ====Add and Remove Resource Groups====<br /> [[File:Illustration55.png|thumb|frame|Illustration 55: Add resource group dialog.]]<br /> To add a resource group you simply press the “New resource group” button and the following window will show. Type the name for the new resource and press “Create”. If you change your mind, press the “Cancel” button. Resource groups are global and writable and that means that names must be unique. The reason for this is that a resource group name takes on the form as both the resources car and WCU and those must be unique and therefore the resource groups must also be unique. One can, however, imagine situations where this must not be enforced but at the moment this is the case.<br /> <br /> To remove a resource group, press the “Remove resource group” button. Be aware that no warning is given if there are resources in the group when removing it.<br /> <br /> ====Manipulating Resources in a Resource Group====<br /> In the right hand table in Illustration 56 below, you see a set of resources for a resource group. <br /> [[File:Illustration56.png|left|frame|Illustration 56: Manipulating resources in a resource group.]]<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> Here are both WCUs and cars part of the group. In addition to the type there is a column named “Synchronized”. That column only applies to WCUs. The use of this column is as follows. Assume you have a resource group consisting of 50 WCUs. Further, lets make a configuration change to that resource group. Depending on where the WCUs geographically are and how they are used the WCUs will be updated at different times. How do you you know when all WCUs are up to date in the resource group? You could check them individually in the “Vehicles” panel but that is not very elegant and time saving. Instead, just watch the “Synchronized” column for the WCUs. When a WCU is up to date with respect to the group configuration the column will read “true”. The value is updated each 30 seconds.<br /> <br /> You can remove individual resources from a group by selecting the resource and then press the “Remove resource” button.<br /> <br /> Yet another button remains and it is the button “Base Group on Resource”. When you add a WCU to a resource group in the “Vehicles” panel you have the option of not updating the WCU configuration to match the one of the resource group's, see Illustration 39 in [[#Resource Groups]]. Using this function it is possible to base the whole group on a WCU's configuration rather than the group's configuration.<br /> <br /> ===The WCU Status Tab===<br /> This view is supposed to be used as for supervising a set of vehicles. The supervision done in real time and the values for the set of vehicles are updated as soon as they arrive on the server from the different vehicles.<br /> <br /> The set of status information collected comprises three parts:<br /> <br /> '''General information:'''<br /> * Alive, a heart beat signal<br /> * Connectivity, what data rates are currently available to the vehicle.<br /> ** 3G<br /> ** 2G<br /> ** none<br /> * Cell Signal Quality (CSQ). Indicates the signal strength of the mobile modem. The values are between 0 – 31, the higher the value the better. The special value of 99 is designated an unknown or not even detectable signal.<br /> * GPS, simply a binary indicator of fix or no fix for the GPS.<br /> <br /> '''Data Storage Usage:'''<br><br /> This set of data informs how much collected data resides in the WCU for each type of data collector (module). Total data indicates how much of the total amount of data storage available is used. After that, each type of data collector is lined up.<br /> <br /> '''Data Collection Status:'''<br><br /> When modules collect data they go through a set of states when triggers starts, stops and other events occur. Currently, only such events for the signal reader module is available. An optional message accompanying the current state is shown in parenthesis.<br /> <br /> The screen is divided in two parts, on the left hand side is a table with search functionality for finding the vehicles of interest and on the right hand side is the monitored vehicles. To monitor a vehicles you search for it in the table and then drag and drop the vehicle on the right hand panel.<br /> <br /> A view of the panel is depicted in Illustration 57 below.<br /> [[File:Illustration57.png|left|frame|Illustration 57: The WCU Status tab.]]</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Roles_and_permissions&diff=775 Roles and permissions 2017-07-20T12:42:35Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>== Roles and permissions==</includeonly><br /> In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> [[File:Edit roles and permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of three tables. The top left table holds a list of the roles, the top right holds the user(s) for the selected role and the bottom one hold the selected role's permissions. Their size is adjustable and you can minimize them by clicking on the line between them.<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “Add role” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the red button next to it. When making a role you add a description and unique name. To edit an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top left table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions and the upper right table shows which users have that role. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be a list of resources and resource groups that the permission applies to.<br /> <br /> === '''Creating and editing roles and permissions''' ===<br /> [[File:Add permission.png|thumb|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> To create a new permission press the “Add permission” button. It opens the following interaction depicted in illustration 52.<br /> [[File:Editing permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 53: Editing assignment permissions]]<br /> # Selecting Which kind of permission you want. there are 8 different permissions 7 to give permissions to WCUs and one to give permission to all assignments(the assignment permission can not be modified).The different assignments for WCUs are:<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Configuration.''' The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type. Now the permission is actually created but it can be changed to your likings. Illustration 53 shows the dialog Where you edit the permission.<br /> # Choosing if the permission should be a read and/or write permission. One of these have to be selected or you will not be able to save changes.<br /> # Selecting which resources that apply to the permission. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 53. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group. To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow. There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> # Set which kind of assignments the permission applies to. It is automatically set to have all selected but you can unselect all and selecting other assignments. This option is only availible on the assignment, monitor and module permission.<br /> When you are done press "Save changes" or "Reset changes" if you want to revert the changes. You can always edit the permission by selecting it getting the same dialog and change it except that you can not change what type of assignment it is.<br /> <br /> === Changing a users roles and permissions ===<br /> You can change a users roles under in the edit user dialog if you press the button "Edit user roles". The edit user dialog then gets extended as two boxes appear, a left one with available roles and a right one with current roles. In the left one you can search the role(s) you want and drag them to the right box or press the button pointing right. With the two buttons at the bottom corner(the paper and clipboard ones) you can copy the names of the roles and also insert the names of roles to add them.<br /> <br /> You can also change a users permission to view tasks in the tasks tab. By right-clicking the permission(s) you want to change permissions one and going to "Permission" you will get the options "Show who can see assignment" and "Add who can see assignment". "Show who can see assignment" will open a window with a left and a right box where the left contains users without permission to view the assignment and the right conatins users who have permission. By moving users from the left to right and vice versa you can give or remove someones permission. You can also press the clibboard the the right bottom to copy the users who have permissions or add users by writing their name within parentheses. Users in the right box can be unselectable and that is if they have a role giving them the permission to view that assignment the only way to remove that is to remove that role from them. "Add who can see assignment" works the same way as "Show who can see assignment" except that the right box does not show users with permission so you can not remove permissions, this si so that with add you can add permissions for many assignments at the same time as the show can not show users from many assignments.<br /> [[File:Copy user assignment permissions.png|thumb|300x300px|Illustration 54: Copy user assignment permissions dialog]]<br /> You can also edit a users role by searching for user(s) and right clicking on them to get a window with different options. There are five different options where the three first can be used on multiple users at the same time while the bottom two can not.<br /> * "Add user assignment permissions to this user" will open the dialog shown in illustration 54. With this button you take a users assignment permissions and add them to the selected user(s). You do this by searching and selecting a user and then pressing "OK".<br /> * "Replace user assignment permissions with user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button i much like the one before except that instead of adding permissions to the current this replaces the permissions that the selected user(s) have. Here you also search the user whose permissions you want to replace the select them and press "OK".<br /> * "Copy user roles to this user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button instead of replacing permissions replace selected user(s) roles with the roles of a user who you chose. Search the user whose roles you want to copy for replacement and press "OK".[[File:Give permission on car.png|thumb|Illustration 55: Give permission on car dialog]]<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on Car" is quite self explanatory and is to give assignment permission on one or many cars. The dialog will look like illustration 55. In the left box you select cars and move them to the right to give permission on them, you can also as you see below the left box select a file with cars to easily select a set of cars. Then you select which types of assignments it should give permission to (leaving this empty will not give any permissions). You can also check the checkbox "Reset user permission" to replace the roles of the selected user instead of adding new to the current ones.<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on WCU" is identical to the previous button except that it applies to WCUs instead of Cars.<br /> {{DEFAULTSORT:Rolas and Permissions}}</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Roles_and_permissions&diff=774 Roles and permissions 2017-07-20T12:38:59Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> [[File:Edit roles and permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of three tables. The top left table holds a list of the roles, the top right holds the user(s) for the selected role and the bottom one hold the selected role's permissions. Their size is adjustable and you can minimize them by clicking on the line between them.<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “Add role” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the red button next to it. When making a role you add a description and unique name. To edit an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top left table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions and the upper right table shows which users have that role. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be a list of resources and resource groups that the permission applies to.<br /> <br /> === '''Creating and editing roles and permissions''' ===<br /> [[File:Add permission.png|thumb|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> To create a new permission press the “Add permission” button. It opens the following interaction depicted in illustration 52.<br /> [[File:Editing permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 53: Editing assignment permissions]]<br /> # Selecting Which kind of permission you want. there are 8 different permissions 7 to give permissions to WCUs and one to give permission to all assignments(the assignment permission can not be modified).The different assignments for WCUs are:<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Configuration.''' The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type. Now the permission is actually created but it can be changed to your likings. Illustration 53 shows the dialog Where you edit the permission.<br /> # Choosing if the permission should be a read and/or write permission. One of these have to be selected or you will not be able to save changes.<br /> # Selecting which resources that apply to the permission. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 53. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group. To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow. There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> # Set which kind of assignments the permission applies to. It is automatically set to have all selected but you can unselect all and selecting other assignments. This option is only availible on the assignment, monitor and module permission.<br /> When you are done press "Save changes" or "Reset changes" if you want to revert the changes. You can always edit the permission by selecting it getting the same dialog and change it except that you can not change what type of assignment it is.<br /> <br /> === Changing a users roles and permissions ===<br /> You can change a users roles under in the edit user dialog if you press the button "Edit user roles". The edit user dialog then gets extended as two boxes appear, a left one with available roles and a right one with current roles. In the left one you can search the role(s) you want and drag them to the right box or press the button pointing right. With the two buttons at the bottom corner(the paper and clipboard ones) you can copy the names of the roles and also insert the names of roles to add them.<br /> <br /> You can also change a users permission to view tasks in the tasks tab. By right-clicking the permission(s) you want to change permissions one and going to "Permission" you will get the options "Show who can see assignment" and "Add who can see assignment". "Show who can see assignment" will open a window with a left and a right box where the left contains users without permission to view the assignment and the right conatins users who have permission. By moving users from the left to right and vice versa you can give or remove someones permission. You can also press the clibboard the the right bottom to copy the users who have permissions or add users by writing their name within parentheses. Users in the right box can be unselectable and that is if they have a role giving them the permission to view that assignment the only way to remove that is to remove that role from them. "Add who can see assignment" works the same way as "Show who can see assignment" except that the right box does not show users with permission so you can not remove permissions, this si so that with add you can add permissions for many assignments at the same time as the show can not show users from many assignments.<br /> [[File:Copy user assignment permissions.png|thumb|300x300px|Illustration 54: Copy user assignment permissions dialog]]<br /> You can also edit a users role by searching for user(s) and right clicking on them to get a window with different options. There are five different options where the three first can be used on multiple users at the same time while the bottom two can not.<br /> * "Add user assignment permissions to this user" will open the dialog shown in illustration 54. With this button you take a users assignment permissions and add them to the selected user(s). You do this by searching and selecting a user and then pressing "OK".<br /> * "Replace user assignment permissions with user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button i much like the one before except that instead of adding permissions to the current this replaces the permissions that the selected user(s) have. Here you also search the user whose permissions you want to replace the select them and press "OK".<br /> * "Copy user roles to this user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button instead of replacing permissions replace selected user(s) roles with the roles of a user who you chose. Search the user whose roles you want to copy for replacement and press "OK".[[File:Give permission on car.png|thumb|Illustration 55: Give permission on car dialog]]<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on Car" is quite self explanatory and is to give assignment permission on one or many cars. The dialog will look like illustration 55. In the left box you select cars and move them to the right to give permission on them, you can also as you see below the left box select a file with cars to easily select a set of cars. Then you select which types of assignments it should give permission to (leaving this empty will not give any permissions). You can also check the checkbox "Reset user permission" to replace the roles of the selected user instead of adding new to the current ones.<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on WCU" is identical to the previous button except that it applies to WCUs instead of Cars.<br /> {{DEFAULTSORT:Rolas and Permissions}}</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Roles_and_permissions&diff=773 Roles and permissions 2017-07-20T10:10:05Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: Created page with "In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of..."</p> <hr /> <div>In order to restrict access to resources and functions in the portal, there is a framework for controlling this using roles and permissions. Permissions are given on a set of resources. These permissions are grouped into roles, and roles are then attached to one or several users to be granted specific permissions.<br /> [[File:Edit roles and permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 51: The edit roles and permissions dialog.]]<br /> The “Edit roles and permission” dialog can be seen in Illustration 51. It consists of three tables. The top left table holds a list of the roles, the top right holds the user(s) for the selected role and the bottom one hold the selected role's permissions. Their size is adjustable and you can minimize them by clicking on the line between them.<br /> <br /> You add a new role by pressing the button “Add role” and delete a role along with its permissions by pressing the red button next to it. When making a role you add a description and unique name. To edit an already existing role, double click the entry you wish to edit.<br /> <br /> When you select a role in the top left table, the lower table shows that specific role's permissions and the upper right table shows which users have that role. The permissions table consists of two columns, a string that is the actual permission and the set of resources that apply to that permission. In the illustration above there is only one resource but there can be a list of resources and resource groups that the permission applies to.<br /> <br /> === '''Creating and editing permissions''' ===<br /> [[File:Add permission.png|thumb|Illustration 52: Creating a new permission]]<br /> To create a new permission press the “Add permission” button. It opens the following interaction depicted in illustration 52.<br /> [[File:Editing permissions.png|thumb|400x400px|Illustration 53: Editing assignment permissions]]<br /> # Selecting Which kind of permission you want. there are 8 different permissions 7 to give permissions to WCUs and one to give permission to all assignments(the assignment permission can not be modified).The different assignments for WCUs are:<br /> ## '''Assignment'''. Controls if a user is permitted to create/see assignments of a specific kind on a WCU.<br /> ## '''Configuration.''' The permission says if you are allowed to work with a WCU's configuration.<br /> ## '''Module'''. The permission controls the access to individual module configurations. An example of a module is MCD-Hub.<br /> ## '''Monitor'''. An assignment can have a monitor function to report data in real time. In order to see the real time data the user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Plot route'''. To see a historic GPS track of a WCU a user must have this permission.<br /> ## '''Position'''. Allows a user to see a WCU's current position.<br /> ## '''View'''. This permission applies to the Vehicles tab. It has to do with whether you are allowed to list any WCUs in the table. Selecting this subtype makes the subtype type part unnecessary and therefore, it is removed if you choose this resource type. Now the permission is actually created but it can be changed to your likings. Illustration 53 shows the dialog Where you edit the permission.<br /> # Choosing if the permission should be a read and/or write permission. One of these have to be selected or you will not be able to save changes.<br /> # Selecting which resources that apply to the permission. The selection is made using the two tables you see in Illustration 53. To select a resource, which can be a resource group, you enter the name of the resource in the left table filter area. As you type, the table is automatically filled with resources matching the criteria. If a resource is part of a resource group the icon to the left is shown. If you hold the mouse over the resource name you will see which resource group it is part of. If you instead see the icon shown to the left, the resource is a resource group. Holding the mouse over the entry will show you which resources are part of the resource group. To select a resource, drag it over to the right table or select the resource and then press the right-arrow. To deselect a resource, drag it to the left table or press the left-arrow. There is a “Select all” option. It selects all current and future resources to which this permission should be applied.<br /> # Set which kind of assignments the permission applies to. It is automatically set to have all selected but you can unselect all and selecting other assignments. This option is only availible on the assignment, monitor and module permission.<br /> When you are done press "Save changes" or "Reset changes" if you want to revert the changes. You can always edit the permission by selecting it getting the same dialog and change it except that you can not change what type of assignment it is.<br /> <br /> === Changing a users roles ===<br /> You can change a users roles under in the edit user dialog if you press the button "Edit user roles". The edit user dialog then gets extended as two boxes appear, a left one with available roles and a right one with current roles. In the left one you can search the role(s) you want and drag them to the right box or press the button pointing right. With the two buttons at the bottom corner(the paper and clipboard ones) you can copy the names of the roles and also insert the names of roles to add them.<br /> [[File:Copy user assignment permissions.png|thumb|300x300px|Illustration 54: Copy user assignment permissions dialog]]<br /> You can also edit a users role by searching for user(s) and right clicking on them to get a window with different options. There are five different options where the three first can be used on multiple users at the same time while the bottom two can not.<br /> * "Add user assignment permissions to this user" will open the dialog shown in illustration 54. With this button you take a users assignment permissions and add them to the selected user(s). You do this by searching and selecting a user and then pressing "OK".<br /> * "Replace user assignment permissions with user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button i much like the one before except that instead of adding permissions to the current this replaces the permissions that the selected user(s) have. Here you also search the user whose permissions you want to replace the select them and press "OK".<br /> * "Copy user roles to this user" will open a similar dialog to illustration 54. This button instead of replacing permissions replace selected user(s) roles with the roles of a user who you chose. Search the user whose roles you want to copy for replacement and press "OK".[[File:Give permission on car.png|thumb|Illustration 55: Give permission on car dialog]]<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on Car" is quite self explanatory and is to give assignment permission on one or many cars. The dialog will look like illustration 55. In the left box you select cars and move them to the right to give permission on them, you can also as you see below the left box select a file with cars to easily select a set of cars. Then you select which types of assignments it should give permission to (leaving this empty will not give any permissions). You can also check the checkbox "Reset user permission" to replace the roles of the selected user instead of adding new to the current ones.<br /> * "Give this user permission to all assignments on WCU" is identical to the previous button except that it applies to WCUs instead of Cars.<br /> {{DEFAULTSORT:Rolas and Permissions}}</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Give_permission_on_car.png&diff=772 File:Give permission on car.png 2017-07-20T10:07:57Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>Give permission on car dialog</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Copy_user_assignment_permissions.png&diff=771 File:Copy user assignment permissions.png 2017-07-20T10:05:38Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>Copy user assignment permissions dialog</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Editing_permissions.png&diff=770 File:Editing permissions.png 2017-07-19T11:18:02Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>The dialog to edit permissions</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Add_permission.png&diff=769 File:Add permission.png 2017-07-19T11:00:51Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>Add permission dialog</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=File:Edit_roles_and_permissions.png&diff=768 File:Edit roles and permissions.png 2017-07-19T09:54:42Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>The edit roles and permissions window</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Tasks_Tab&diff=767 Tasks Tab 2017-07-18T09:49:25Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>= Tasks Tab=</includeonly><br /> <div class="keywords"> Regexp, regex, reg ex, regual expression </div><br /> [[File:Illustration14.png|thumb|The search panel for finding tasks.]]<br /> In the task tab you can search for tasks, view their assignment, see the log files, see the result files, manage assignments, and much more.<br /> <br /> ==The Search Fields Section==<br /> The search field section consists of different columns where most have a field where you can insert search criteria to find assignments. As an example you have the label “Task ID:” which searches the field for task IDs matching your search criteria. When searching for tasks you can fill in one or more columns where the different search criteria will be treated with a logical AND between eachother.<br /> <br /> There are 21 different columns where some you can fill in a search criteria and some you can not. Below is a table with all the columns followed by a quick description. Note that the columns with a star is the one where you can put in search criteria to filter results.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> !Task ID*<br /> |The nummeric Task ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Assignmnet*<br /> |The assignment's name.<br /> |-<br /> !Type*<br /> |Different options for assignment types where one or more can be selected.<br /> |-<br /> !WCU ID*<br /> |The WCU's ID and also the column where you see the WCU's label.<br /> |-<br /> !Upload size<br /> |The upload size of all the assignment's uploads given in Kbytes.<br /> |-<br /> !Plate number*<br /> |The car's plate number.<br /> |-<br /> !Status*<br /> |Different options for assignment statuses where one or more can be selected.<br /> |-<br /> !Last log<br /> |When the last log file was transferred to the portal.<br /> |-<br /> !Last upload<br /> |Date of the assignments's last upload.<br /> |-<br /> !VIN*<br /> |The car's VIN ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Proto number*<br /> |The proto number.<br /> |-<br /> !Project*<br /> |The project ID.<br /> |-<br /> !TSU*<br /> |The TSU ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Car comment*<br /> |The car's comment/description.<br /> |-<br /> !Series*<br /> |The series attribut.<br /> |-<br /> !Message*<br /> |The assignment's status message.<br /> |-<br /> !WCU name*<br /> |The name of the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> !Task owner<br /> |The current owner of the task.<br /> |-<br /> !Expire date<br /> |The date the assignment will expire.<br /> |-<br /> !Task creator<br /> |The original creator of the task.<br /> |-<br /> !Creation date<br /> |The creation date of the assignment.<br /> |}<br /> In every collumn you can use regular expressions for your searches. To designate an "all" search you enter a period (".") for that particular field or leave it empty if another field is already filled. All searches are treated with the letters as wild-cards. An example is if you intend to search for tasks containing the word “bear” simply enter “bear” in the text field. Now, if there are tasks with the names “bear”, “polar bear”and “unbearable” all of these will match as they contain the word “bear” somewhere.<br /> <br /> To search for a range of WCUs, assume the WCUs MM-810:1 – MM-823:1, you enter the query 81[0-9]|82[0-3]. This is a regular expression where the first expression, 81[0-9], means that we want our search to start with an '8' followed by a '1' and then any digit in range 0-9. The second part, 82[0-3], means an '8' followed by a '2' and then any digit in range 0-3. The two expressions are combined with a pipe characater ("|") which means logical OR. In other words we are looking for range 810-819 OR 820-823.<br /> <br /> '''Note!''' If your WCU/resource group you are searching for has special characters (like '(' or '/') in its name you may need to escape these characters in order to get the desired result. Escape means putting a '\' before the special character. For example if you want to enter (and search for) the resource group name 'ABC(Alpha_Bravo_Charlie)' you need to write 'ABC\(Alpha\_Bravo\_Charlie\)'. Another example is when you want to list a WCU that contains "07-51" in its name. In this case you need to type "07\-51", otherwise the "-" character will make the searcher to search for a range of numbers.<br /> <br /> For more info how to use regular expressions, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression#Standards Regular Expressions]<br /> <br /> When you are filling in search criteria you can see in the top right corner how WICE says "Rows found:". That tell you how many assignments your search will find so you know if you need to narrow or broaden your search.<br /> <br /> In the bottom right corner you have two binoculars. With these you can save and load your search criterias and shown columns for future uses. You can also set a view of criteria and columns as your default by hovering over the view you want and then pressing the pin button. There is also two magnifying glasses that can save and load your search results so even if their information change and can not be found with the same search criteria you can still find them. You can also pair a search with a view by going to your searches and then on the search click the binocular button and select which view you want to pair it with. You can also pair them going to your searches and press "Select search views" where you get a window with the option to pair your searches with views.<br /> <br /> If you are using an older version than 2.45.0 you have 4 bars with calanders to the right of them. This is a function to search assignments by date of creation and last update. This function has been removed in 2.45.0 and does not work like intended in 2.44.8.<br /> <br /> In 2.45.0 and forward there will at the top be a option to search assignments after their label. By selecting multiple labels you can search for more than one at the same time.<br /> <br /> == The Result Section ==<br /> The assignments are fetched when you press the "Search" button in the tasks tab. Here we will go through the bottom part of task tab and the options for your previous search.<br /> ===Assignment Options===<br /> You can right-click one or many assignments to get a window with a range of options described below:<br /> * "Show task description" will show you the description of the task that the assignment you right-clicked on belongs <br /> * "Go to Vehicles Panel" will take you to the vehicles tab. When you are in the vehicles tab the car(s) you selected will be shown in the vehicles tab.<br /> * "Go to Search Panel" will take you to the search tab. When you are in the search tab the WCU(s) you selected will be selected in the search tab.<br /> * "Get/Show assignment" will give you a small pop-up with some assignment information and a "Download assignment" button if a download is possible. If you choose to press "Download assignment" the assignment file will be downloaded to your computer in its original format.<br /> * "Edit task" will give you the option to edit ownership and expiration date of the task. It will also show you the WCU(s) the task is running on. <br /> * "Show car info" and "Show WCU info" will give you a pop-up showing you available info of the assignment car and WCU. Depending on which car/WCU you choose there will be different information available since cars/WCUs can lack information. <br /> * "Show message" will show you the assignment's status message. <br /> * "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> * "Event subscription" is an option where you choose to subscibe to a car, a WCU or an assignment. When hovering above "Event subscription" you will see three options, "Connect", "Assignment status" and "Result upload". With the option "Connect " you can subscribe to the selected car(s) or WCU(s) and get notified when their connection status changes. "Assignment status" and "Result upload" subscribes you to selected assignment(s) and gets you notified about status changes and when results are uploaded. You will se events when clicking on the bell symbol at the top which gets a red dot when theres new events from your subscriptions.<br /> <br /> ===Column Options===<br /> The result section have alot of ways to sort, view and handle the result with the columns. When right-clicking a column you will get a window with different options for the column. <br /> * "Sort Ascending" and "Sort Descending" will sort the assignments in ascending or descending order after the column's attribute.<br /> * "Configure Sort" where you can add more levels of sorting so that it sorts for more than one thing in different priority. For example can you sort after task ID ascending and then sort after WCU ID descending. When a column has a sorting prefrens the option "Clear Sort" will appear which clears your sorting prefrences for that column. <br /> * "Columns" opens a window where you can select which columns you want to have shown and which you want to have hidden by checking their boxes or unchecking them. If you remove a column with a filled search criteria that criteria will still matter when you make a new search. Also when you make the new search the column will reappear.<br /> * "Group by" group together the assignments that share the column's attribute value. When they are grouped there will be the option "Ungroup" that ungroups them. <br /> * "Freeze" moves the column to the left corner and freezes it in position so it can be rearranged. If there is alraedy a frozen column till will move next to it as they go from left to right in chronological order. The "freeze" then becomes "Unfreeze" which revertes the freeze. <br /> * "Export to excel" will export the columns and results into an excel file that will get downloaded. <br /> * "Clear all fields" will clear all columns of their criteria. <br /> * "Get help for this column" should take you here.<br /> <br /> ===Get result files===<br /> When selecting a file you can view the result files by pressing "Get Result Files" if there are available result files. That will create a window where you can search, view and download result files. It is also possible to view result files from multiple assignments at the same time by selecting many assignments of the same type (Only possible for signalreader and MCD-Hub).<br /> ====Searching result files====<br /> The window will look different depending on what kind of assignment you selected watching. The different windows all share alot of tools and have the same concept, to search and filter files. In illustration x you can see how a MCD-Hub result window looks. This is a great example as this window contains all different tools while all the others can be seen as an MCD-Hub window that does not need and therefore lacks some of the tools. There are some tools that all have and just like when creating a task the common ones are at the top. Below is a description of all tools followed by which assignment window that has them:<br /> <br /> ===== General search functions =====<br /> [[File:Get Result files.png|thumb|400x400px|illustration 6: The-MCD-Hub result file window.]]<br /> At the top there are two boxes, labeled "Description" and "Filename", where you can search for files based on their description and filename. The "Description" box is disabled so that you can not type in it. When searching after filename it will search after the not compiled files and not the compiled files. Below those are two other boxes with two checkboxes. The boxes are labeled "From" and "To" and contain dates that can be changed by pressing the calender next to the box. The files are filtered so only files between those two dates are shown. The checkboxes are labeled "Measurement Date" and "Upload to Portal" and only one of them can be checked. The checkboxes tell if the files will be filtered by measurement or upload date. There is also a checkbox labeled "Hide downloaded files" which will filter out already downloaded files but this button is disabled if the checkbox "Compline by portal update date" is checked. These tools are the same for all type of assignments and can be seen as marked green in illustration 6. <br /> <br /> ===== GPX inclusion =====<br /> The checkbox "Include GPX" enables gpx files to be downloaded when downloading result files. That means each downloaded result file will have a corresponding gpx file containing the route of the car when the assignment was executed. Note that the en date for the route is 24 hours after the start since assignments does not always have end dates. ETAS, Softhub, SignalReader and MCD-Hub assignments has this tool and its marked pink in illustration x. <br /> <br /> ===== File type filters =====<br /> There are three areas of checkboxes that are framed by a blue line and a sqaure checkbox labeled "Raw". The areas and the checkbox filter what type of files are shown. The framed areas stand for one filetype with their own subgroups. The areas are labeled with what file type they filter. When the square checkbox in the framed area is checked it will show you that areas file type. When their square checkbox is not checked the other checkboxes are disabled as they are the subgroups for that file type. The "Raw" checkbox is simpler as it only stands for if you want to show raw files and lacks subgroups. As with the other search functions in the WICE portal leaving all filters empty will result in everything being shown. The area labeled "Text" has 3 other checkboxes which will show you "Common", "Separate" and "All" text files. Note that not all text files have the subtype "Common" or "Seprate" and can only be shown in "All". The area labeled "MDF" has two other checkboxes which will you mdf files "With module names" or "Without module names" as a prefix for the signalnames. The area labeled "Vector" has two other checkboxes which will show you files refering to frames by "Frame ID" or "Frame name". MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have these tools but do not that Signalreader does not have the "Raw" button and can show all text files. These tools are marked blue in illustration x. <br /> <br /> ===== Compile by upload date =====<br /> The checkbox "Compile by portal upload date" will compile result files in a conteporary zip file if they were uploaded at the same time. When the files are compiled alot of functions that usually works on result files works differently or does not work as the zip file does not really exist or that its more than one file. As mentioned before you can not search for the compiled file since it does not exist. But when searching with this option turned on the compiled file will show up if one or more of the files it contains match the search criteria. This tools is automatically turned on since you are often looking after a specifik upload. MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have this tool and it is marked yellow in illustration x.<br /> ====Handling result files====<br /> When you have selected the result file(s) you want different buttons will be active depending on the file. The buttons are above the column bar and its where you download, view and convert result files. <br /> <br /> "Get file(s)", "Get all files" and "Get log files" will open a dialog to [[Downloading Files|download]] selected files, all files or that dates log files. Note! This section's text needs to be updated as the function of downloading many files logfiles is fuzzy! <br /> <br /> "Save Headers" saves your current view of columns and files and saves it as default. This button has since been replaced by the two binoculars that are described in The Portal User View#The Search Fields Section. We therefore advice you to use the new and improved binoculars as save headers will be removed. <br /> <br /> "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> "View log files" will view log files from the selected file´s date. When viewing log files you can read them by selecting a file and pressing "View file". There is also the option to "Get file(s)", "Save Headers", "Plot route" and "View file" who are all except "View file" described above. "View file" will open the log file in readable format in your current window. You can also filter logfiles like you filter result files by date, name and if they are downloaded or not. Note that when selecting to view log files from many files it will show log files from the oldest file's date and 24 hours forward. <br /> <br /> "View file" will open the file in a readable format in you current window. If the file is compiled by upload date or not readable this button will not be enabled. <br /> <br /> "Convert to text" will convert and download selected MDF file(s) to your computer. When doing this you will get a pop-up with the ability to add a description to your download. This is only availible for MDF files and this button can therefore only be found on assignments with MDF files. <br /> <br /> "Preview data" will give you a data preview window where you can preview the selected file(s) data. To read more about how to use this window and all its functions read [[Preview data]].</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Tasks_Tab&diff=766 Tasks Tab 2017-07-18T09:47:15Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>= Tasks Tab=</includeonly><br /> <div class="keywords"> Regexp, regex, reg ex, regual expression </div><br /> [[File:Illustration14.png|thumb|The search panel for finding tasks.]]<br /> In the task tab you can search for tasks, view their assignment, see the log files, see the result files, manage assignments, and much more.<br /> <br /> ==The Search Fields Section==<br /> The search field section consists of different columns where most have a field where you can insert search criteria to find assignments. As an example you have the label “Task ID:” which searches the field for task IDs matching your search criteria. When searching for tasks you can fill in one or more columns where the different search criteria will be treated with a logical AND between eachother.<br /> <br /> There are 21 different columns where some you can fill in a search criteria and some you can not. Below is a table with all the columns followed by a quick description. Note that the columns with a star is the one where you can put in search criteria to filter results.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> !Task ID*<br /> |The nummeric Task ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Assignmnet*<br /> |The assignment's name.<br /> |-<br /> !Type*<br /> |Different options for assignment types where one or more can be selected.<br /> |-<br /> !WCU ID*<br /> |The WCU's ID and also the column where you see the WCU's label.<br /> |-<br /> !Upload size<br /> |The upload size of all the assignment's uploads given in Kbytes.<br /> |-<br /> !Plate number*<br /> |The car's plate number.<br /> |-<br /> !Status*<br /> |Different options for assignment statuses where one or more can be selected.<br /> |-<br /> !Last log<br /> |When the last log file was transferred to the portal.<br /> |-<br /> !Last upload<br /> |Date of the assignments's last upload.<br /> |-<br /> !VIN*<br /> |The car's VIN ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Proto number*<br /> |The proto number.<br /> |-<br /> !Project*<br /> |The project ID.<br /> |-<br /> !TSU*<br /> |The TSU ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Car comment*<br /> |The car's comment/description.<br /> |-<br /> !Series*<br /> |The series attribut.<br /> |-<br /> !Message*<br /> |The assignment's status message.<br /> |-<br /> !WCU name*<br /> |The name of the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> !Task owner<br /> |The current owner of the task.<br /> |-<br /> !Expire date<br /> |The date the assignment will expire.<br /> |-<br /> !Task creator<br /> |The original creator of the task.<br /> |-<br /> !Creation date<br /> |The creation date of the assignment.<br /> |}<br /> In every collumn you can use regular expressions for your searches. To designate an "all" search you enter a period (".") for that particular field or leave it empty if another field is already filled. All searches are treated with the letters as wild-cards. An example is if you intend to search for tasks containing the word “bear” simply enter “bear” in the text field. Now, if there are tasks with the names “bear”, “polar bear”and “unbearable” all of these will match as they contain the word “bear” somewhere.<br /> <br /> To search for a range of WCUs, assume the WCUs MM-810:1 – MM-823:1, you enter the query 81[0-9]|82[0-3]. This is a regular expression where the first expression, 81[0-9], means that we want our search to start with an '8' followed by a '1' and then any digit in range 0-9. The second part, 82[0-3], means an '8' followed by a '2' and then any digit in range 0-3. The two expressions are combined with a pipe characater ("|") which means logical OR. In other words we are looking for range 810-819 OR 820-823.<br /> <br /> '''Note!''' If your WCU/resource group you are searching for has special characters (like '(' or '/') in its name you may need to escape these characters in order to get the desired result. Escape means putting a '\' before the special character. For example if you want to enter (and search for) the resource group name 'ABC(Alpha_Bravo_Charlie)' you need to write 'ABC\(Alpha\_Bravo\_Charlie\)'. Another example is when you want to list a WCU that contains "07-51" in its name. In this case you need to type "07\-51", otherwise the "-" character will make the searcher to search for a range of numbers.<br /> <br /> For more info how to use regular expressions, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression#Standards Regular Expressions]<br /> <br /> When you are filling in search criteria you can see in the top right corner how WICE says "Rows found:". That tell you how many assignments your search will find so you know if you need to narrow or broaden your search.<br /> <br /> In the bottom right corner you have two binoculars. With these you can save and load your search criterias and shown columns for future uses. You can also set a view of criteria and columns as your default by hovering over the view you want and then pressing the pin button. There is also two magnifying glasses that can save and load your search results so even if their information change and can not be found with the same search criteria you can still find them. You can also pair a search with a view by going to your searches and then on the search click the binocular button and select which view you want to pair it with. You can also pair them going to your searches and press "Select search views" where you get a window with the option to pair your searches with views.<br /> <br /> If you are using an older version than 2.45.0 you have 4 bars with calanders to the right of them. This is a function to search assignments by date of creation and last update. This function has been removed in 2.45.0 and does not work like intended in 2.44.8.<br /> <br /> In 2.45.0 and forward there will at the top be a option to search assignments after their label. By selecting multiple labels you can search for more than one at the same time.<br /> <br /> == The Result Section ==<br /> The assignments are fetched when you press the "Search" button in the tasks tab. Here we will go through the bottom part of task tab and the options for your previous search.<br /> ===Assignment Options===<br /> You can right-click one or many assignments to get a window with a range of options described below:<br /> * "Show task description" will show you the description of the task that the assignment you right-clicked on belongs <br /> * "Go to Vehicles Panel" will take you to the vehicles tab. When you are in the vehicles tab the car(s) you selected will be shown in the vehicles tab.<br /> * "Go to Search Panel" will take you to the search tab. When you are in the search tab the WCU(s) you selected will be selected in the search tab.<br /> * "Get/Show assignment" will give you a small pop-up with some assignment information and a "Download assignment" button if a download is possible. If you choose to press "Download assignment" the assignment file will be downloaded to your computer in its original format.<br /> * "Edit task" will give you the option to edit ownership and expiration date of the task. It will also show you the WCU(s) the task is running on. <br /> * "Show car info" and "Show WCU info" will give you a pop-up showing you available info of the assignment car and WCU. Depending on which car/WCU you choose there will be different information available since cars/WCUs can lack information. <br /> * "Show message" will show you the assignment's status message. <br /> * "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> * "Event subscription" is an option where you choose to subscibe to a car, a WCU or an assignment. When hovering above "Event subscription" you will see three options, "Connect", "Assignment status" and "Result upload". With the option "Connect " you can subscribe to the selected car(s) or WCU(s) and get notified when their connection status changes. "Assignment status" and "Result upload" subscribes you to selected assignment(s) and gets you notified about status changes and when results are uploaded. You will se events when clicking on the bell symbol at the top which gets a red dot when theres new events from your subscriptions.<br /> <br /> ===Column Options===<br /> The result section have alot of ways to sort, view and handle the result with the columns. When right-clicking a column you will get a window with different options for the column. <br /> * "Sort Ascending" and "Sort Descending" will sort the assignments in ascending or descending order after the column's attribute.<br /> * "Configure Sort" where you can add more levels of sorting so that it sorts for more than one thing in different priority. For example can you sort after task ID ascending and then sort after WCU ID descending. When a column has a sorting prefrens the option "Clear Sort" will appear which clears your sorting prefrences for that column. <br /> * "Columns" opens a window where you can select which columns you want to have shown and which you want to have hidden by checking their boxes or unchecking them. If you remove a column with a filled search criteria that criteria will still matter when you make a new search. Also when you make the new search the column will reappear.<br /> * "Group by" group together the assignments that share the column's attribute value. When they are grouped there will be the option "Ungroup" that ungroups them. <br /> * "Freeze" moves the column to the left corner and freezes it in position so it can be rearranged. If there is alraedy a frozen column till will move next to it as they go from left to right in chronological order. The "freeze" then becomes "Unfreeze" which revertes the freeze. <br /> * "Export to excel" will export the columns and results into an excel file that will get downloaded. <br /> * "Clear all fields" will clear all columns of their criteria. <br /> * "Get help for this column" should take you here.<br /> <br /> ===Get result files===<br /> When selecting a file you can view the result files by pressing "Get Result Files" if there are available result files. That will create a window where you can search, view and download result files. It is also possible to view result files from multiple assignments at the same time by selecting many assignments of the same type (Only possible for signalreader and MCD-Hub).<br /> ====Searching result files====<br /> The window will look different depending on what kind of assignment you selected watching. The different windows all share alot of tools and have the same concept, to search and filter files. In illustration x you can see how a MCD-Hub result window looks. This is a great example as this window contains all different tools while all the others can be seen as an MCD-Hub window that does not need and therefore lacks some of the tools. There are some tools that all have and just like when creating a task the common ones are at the top. Below is a description of all tools followed by which assignment window that has them:<br /> <br /> ===== General search functions =====<br /> [[File:Get Result files.png|thumb|400x400px|illustration 6: The-MCD-Hub result file window.]]<br /> At the top there are two boxes, labeled "Description" and "Filename", where you can search for files based on their description and filename. The "Description" box is disabled so that you can not type in it. When searching after filename it will search after the not compiled files and not the compiled files. Below those are two other boxes with two checkboxes. The boxes are labeled "From" and "To" and contain dates that can be changed by pressing the calender next to the box. The files are filtered so only files between those two dates are shown. The checkboxes are labeled "Measurement Date" and "Upload to Portal" and only one of them can be checked. The checkboxes tell if the files will be filtered by measurement or upload date. There is also a checkbox labeled "Hide downloaded files" which will filter out already downloaded files but this button is disabled if the checkbox "Compline by portal update date" is checked. These tools are the same for all type of assignments and can be seen as marked green in illustration 6. <br /> <br /> ===== GPX inclusion =====<br /> The checkbox "Include GPX" enables gpx files to be downloaded when downloading result files. That means each downloaded result file will have a corresponding gpx file containing the route of the car when the assignment was executed. Note that the en date for the route is 24 hours after the start since assignments does not always have end dates. ETAS, Softhub, SignalReader and MCD-Hub assignments has this tool and its marked pink in illustration x. <br /> <br /> ===== File type filters =====<br /> There are three areas of checkboxes that are framed by a blue line and a sqaure checkbox labeled "Raw". The areas and the checkbox filter what type of files are shown. The framed areas stand for one filetype with their own subgroups. The areas are labeled with what file type they filter. When the square checkbox in the framed area is checked it will show you that areas file type. When their square checkbox is not checked the other checkboxes are disabled as they are the subgroups for that file type. The "Raw" checkbox is simpler as it only stands for if you want to show raw files and lacks subgroups. As with the other search functions in the WICE portal leaving all filters empty will result in everything being shown. The area labeled "Text" has 3 other checkboxes which will show you "Common", "Separate" and "All" text files. Note that not all text files have the subtype "Common" or "Seprate" and can only be shown in "All". The area labeled "MDF" has two other checkboxes which will you mdf files "With module names" or "Without module names" as a prefix for the signalnames. The area labeled "Vector" has two other checkboxes which will show you files refering to frames by "Frame ID" or "Frame name". MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have these tools but do not that Signalreader does not have the "Raw" button and can show all text files. These tools are marked blue in illustration x. <br /> <br /> ===== Compile by upload date =====<br /> The checkbox "Compile by portal upload date" will compile result files in a conteporary zip file if they were uploaded at the same time. When the files are compiled alot of functions that usually works on result files works differently or does not work as the zip file does not really exist or that its more than one file. As mentioned before you can not search for the compiled file since it does not exist. But when searching with this option turned on the compiled file will show up if one or more of the files it contains match the search criteria. This tools is automatically turned on since you are often looking after a specifik upload. MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have this tool and it is marked yellow in illustration x.<br /> ====Handling result files====<br /> When you have selected the result file(s) you want different buttons will be active depending on the file. The buttons are above the column bar and its where you download, view and convert result files. <br /> <br /> "Get file(s)", "Get all files" and "Get log files" will open a dialog to [[Downloading Files|download]] selected files, all files or that dates log files. Note! This section's text needs to be updated as the function of downloading many files logfiles is fuzzy! <br /> <br /> "Save Headers" saves your current view of columns and files and saves it as default. This button has since been replaced by the two binoculars that are described in The Portal User View#The Search Fields Section. We therefore advice you to use the new and improved binoculars as save headers will be removed. <br /> <br /> "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> "View log files" will view log files from the selected file´s date. When viewing log files you can read them by selecting a file and pressing "View file". There is also the option to "Get file(s)", "Save Headers", "Plot route" and "View file" who are all except "View file" described above. "View file" will open the log file in readable format in your current window. You can also filter logfiles like you filter result files by date, name and if they are downloaded or not. <br /> <br /> "View file" will open the file in a readable format in you current window. If the file is compiled by upload date or not readable this button will not be enabled. <br /> <br /> "Convert to text" will convert and download selected MDF file(s) to your computer. When doing this you will get a pop-up with the ability to add a description to your download. This is only availible for MDF files and this button can therefore only be found on assignments with MDF files. <br /> <br /> "Preview data" will give you a data preview window where you can preview the selected file(s) data. To read more about how to use this window and all its functions read [[Preview data]].</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Tasks_Tab&diff=765 Tasks Tab 2017-07-18T07:48:47Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>= Tasks Tab=</includeonly><br /> <div class="keywords"> Regexp, regex, reg ex, regual expression </div><br /> [[File:Illustration14.png|thumb|The search panel for finding tasks.]]<br /> In the task tab you can search for tasks, view their assignment, see the log files, see the result files, manage assignments, and much more.<br /> <br /> ==The Search Fields Section==<br /> The search field section consists of different columns where most have a field where you can insert search criteria to find assignments. As an example you have the label “Task ID:” which searches the field for task IDs matching your search criteria. When searching for tasks you can fill in one or more columns where the different search criteria will be treated with a logical AND between eachother.<br /> <br /> There are 21 different columns where some you can fill in a search criteria and some you can not. Below is a table with all the columns followed by a quick description. Note that the columns with a star is the one where you can put in search criteria to filter results.<br /> {| class="wikitable"<br /> !Task ID*<br /> |The nummeric Task ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Assignmnet*<br /> |The assignment's name.<br /> |-<br /> !Type*<br /> |Different options for assignment types where one or more can be selected.<br /> |-<br /> !WCU ID*<br /> |The WCU's ID and also the column where you see the WCU's label.<br /> |-<br /> !Upload size<br /> |The upload size of all the assignment's uploads given in Kbytes.<br /> |-<br /> !Plate number*<br /> |The car's plate number.<br /> |-<br /> !Status*<br /> |Different options for assignment statuses where one or more can be selected.<br /> |-<br /> !Last log<br /> |When the last log file was transferred to the portal.<br /> |-<br /> !Last upload<br /> |Date of the assignments's last upload.<br /> |-<br /> !VIN*<br /> |The car's VIN ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Proto number*<br /> |The proto number.<br /> |-<br /> !Project*<br /> |The project ID.<br /> |-<br /> !TSU*<br /> |The TSU ID.<br /> |-<br /> !Car comment*<br /> |The car's comment/description.<br /> |-<br /> !Series*<br /> |The series attribut.<br /> |-<br /> !Message*<br /> |The assignment's status message.<br /> |-<br /> !WCU name*<br /> |The name of the WCU.<br /> |-<br /> !Task owner<br /> |The current owner of the task.<br /> |-<br /> !Expire date<br /> |The date the assignment will expire.<br /> |-<br /> !Task creator<br /> |The original creator of the task.<br /> |-<br /> !Creation date<br /> |The creation date of the assignment.<br /> |}<br /> In every collumn you can use regular expressions for your searches. To designate an "all" search you enter a period (".") for that particular field or leave it empty if another field is already filled. All searches are treated with the letters as wild-cards. An example is if you intend to search for tasks containing the word “bear” simply enter “bear” in the text field. Now, if there are tasks with the names “bear”, “polar bear”and “unbearable” all of these will match as they contain the word “bear” somewhere.<br /> <br /> To search for a range of WCUs, assume the WCUs MM-810:1 – MM-823:1, you enter the query 81[0-9]|82[0-3]. This is a regular expression where the first expression, 81[0-9], means that we want our search to start with an '8' followed by a '1' and then any digit in range 0-9. The second part, 82[0-3], means an '8' followed by a '2' and then any digit in range 0-3. The two expressions are combined with a pipe characater ("|") which means logical OR. In other words we are looking for range 810-819 OR 820-823.<br /> <br /> '''Note!''' If your WCU/resource group you are searching for has special characters (like '(' or '/') in its name you may need to escape these characters in order to get the desired result. Escape means putting a '\' before the special character. For example if you want to enter (and search for) the resource group name 'ABC(Alpha_Bravo_Charlie)' you need to write 'ABC\(Alpha\_Bravo\_Charlie\)'. Another example is when you want to list a WCU that contains "07-51" in its name. In this case you need to type "07\-51", otherwise the "-" character will make the searcher to search for a range of numbers.<br /> <br /> For more info how to use regular expressions, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression#Standards Regular Expressions]<br /> <br /> When you are filling in search criteria you can see in the top right corner how WICE says "Rows found:". That tell you how many assignments your search will find so you know if you need to narrow or broaden your search.<br /> <br /> In the bottom right corner you have two binoculars. With these you can save and load your search criterias and shown columns for future uses. You can also set a view of criteria and columns as your default by hovering over the view you want and then pressing the pin button. There is also two magnifying glasses that can save and load your search results so even if their information change and can not be found with the same search criteria you can still find them. You can also pair a search with a view by going to your searches and then on the search click the binocular button and select which view you want to pair it with. You can also pair them going to your searches and press "Select search views" where you get a window with the option to pair your searches with views.<br /> <br /> If you are using an older version than 2.45.0 you have 4 bars with calanders to the right of them. This is a function to search assignments by date of creation and last update. This function has been removed in 2.45.0 and does not work like intended in 2.44.8.<br /> <br /> In 2.45.0 and forward there will at the top be a option to search assignments after their label. By selecting multiple labels you can search for more than one at the same time.<br /> <br /> == The Result Section ==<br /> The assignments are fetched when you press the "Search" button in the tasks tab. Here we will go through the bottom part of task tab and the options for your previous search.<br /> ===Assignment Options===<br /> You can right-click one or many assignments to get a window with a range of options described below:<br /> * "Show task description" will show you the description of the task that the assignment you right-clicked on belongs <br /> * "Go to Vehicles Panel" will take you to the vehicles tab. When you are in the vehicles tab the car(s) you selected will be shown in the vehicles tab.<br /> * "Go to Search Panel" will take you to the search tab. When you are in the search tab the WCU(s) you selected will be selected in the search tab.<br /> * "Get/Show assignment" will give you a small pop-up with some assignment information and a "Download assignment" button if a download is possible. If you choose to press "Download assignment" the assignment file will be downloaded to your computer in its original format.<br /> * "Edit task" will give you the option to edit ownership and expiration date of the task. It will also show you the WCU(s) the task is running on. <br /> * "Show car info" and "Show WCU info" will give you a pop-up showing you available info of the assignment car and WCU. Depending on which car/WCU you choose there will be different information available since cars/WCUs can lack information. <br /> * "Show message" will show you the assignment's status message. <br /> * "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> * "Event subscription" is an option where you choose to subscibe to a car, a WCU or an assignment. When hovering above "Event subscription" you will see three options, "Connect", "Assignment status" and "Result upload". With the option "Connect " you can subscribe to the selected car(s) or WCU(s) and get notified when their connection status changes. "Assignment status" and "Result upload" subscribes you to selected assignment(s) and gets you notified about status changes and when results are uploaded. You will se events when clicking on the bell symbol at the top which gets a red dot when theres new events from your subscriptions.<br /> <br /> ===Column Options===<br /> The result section have alot of ways to sort, view and handle the result with the columns. When right-clicking a column you will get a window with different options for the column. <br /> * "Sort Ascending" and "Sort Descending" will sort the assignments in ascending or descending order after the column's attribute.<br /> * "Configure Sort" where you can add more levels of sorting so that it sorts for more than one thing in different priority. For example can you sort after task ID ascending and then sort after WCU ID descending. When a column has a sorting prefrens the option "Clear Sort" will appear which clears your sorting prefrences for that column. <br /> * "Columns" opens a window where you can select which columns you want to have shown and which you want to have hidden by checking their boxes or unchecking them. If you remove a column with a filled search criteria that criteria will still matter when you make a new search. Also when you make the new search the column will reappear.<br /> * "Group by" group together the assignments that share the column's attribute value. When they are grouped there will be the option "Ungroup" that ungroups them. <br /> * "Freeze" moves the column to the left corner and freezes it in position so it can be rearranged. If there is alraedy a frozen column till will move next to it as they go from left to right in chronological order. The "freeze" then becomes "Unfreeze" which revertes the freeze. <br /> * "Export to excel" will export the columns and results into an excel file that will get downloaded. <br /> * "Clear all fields" will clear all columns of their criteria. <br /> * "Get help for this column" should take you here.<br /> <br /> ===Get result files===<br /> When selecting a file you can view the result files by pressing "Get Result Files" if there are available result files. That will create a window where you can search, view and download result files. It is also possible to view result files from multiple assignments at the same time by selecting many assignments of the same type (Only possible for signalreader and MCD-Hub).<br /> ====Searching result files====<br /> The window will look different depending on what kind of assignment you selected watching. The different windows all share alot of tools and have the same concept, to search and filter files. In illustration x you can see how a MCD-Hub result window looks. This is a great example as this window contains all different tools while all the others can be seen as an MCD-Hub window that does not need and therefore lacks some of the tools. There are some tools that all have and just like when creating a task the common ones are at the top. Below is a description of all tools followed by which assignment window that has them:<br /> <br /> ===== General search functions =====<br /> [[File:Get Result files.png|thumb|400x400px|illustration 6: The-MCD-Hub result file window.]]<br /> At the top there are two boxes, labeled "Description" and "Filename", where you can search for files based on their description and filename. The "Description" box is disabled so that you can not type in it. When searching after filename it will search after the not compiled files and not the compiled files. Below those are two other boxes with two checkboxes. The boxes are labeled "From" and "To" and contain dates that can be changed by pressing the calender next to the box. The files are filtered so only files between those two dates are shown. The checkboxes are labeled "Measurement Date" and "Upload to Portal" and only one of them can be checked. The checkboxes tell if the files will be filtered by measurement or upload date. There is also a checkbox labeled "Hide downloaded files" which will filter out already downloaded files but this button is disabled if the checkbox "Compline by portal update date" is checked. These tools are the same for all type of assignments and can be seen as marked green in illustration 6. <br /> <br /> ===== GPX inclusion =====<br /> The checkbox "Include GPX" enables gpx files to be downloaded when downloading result files. That means each downloaded result file will have a corresponding gpx file containing the route of the car when the assignment was executed. Note that the en date for the route is 24 hours after the start since assignments does not always have end dates. ETAS, Softhub, SignalReader and MCD-Hub assignments has this tool and its marked pink in illustration x. <br /> <br /> ===== File type filters =====<br /> There are three areas of checkboxes that are framed by a blue line and a sqaure checkbox labeled "Raw". The areas and the checkbox filter what type of files are shown. The framed areas stand for one filetype with their own subgroups. The areas are labeled with what file type they filter. When the square checkbox in the framed area is checked it will show you that areas file type. When their square checkbox is not checked the other checkboxes are disabled as they are the subgroups for that file type. The "Raw" checkbox is simpler as it only stands for if you want to show raw files and lacks subgroups. As with the other search functions in the WICE portal leaving all filters empty will result in everything being shown. The area labeled "Text" has 3 other checkboxes which will show you "Common", "Separate" and "All" text files. Note that not all text files have the subtype "Common" or "Seprate" and can only be shown in "All". The area labeled "MDF" has two other checkboxes which will you mdf files "With module names" or "Without module names" as a prefix for the signalnames. The area labeled "Vector" has two other checkboxes which will show you files refering to frames by "Frame ID" or "Frame name". MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have these tools but do not that Signalreader does not have the "Raw" button and can show all text files. These tools are marked blue in illustration x. <br /> <br /> ===== Compile by upload date =====<br /> The checkbox "Compile by portal upload date" will compile result files in a conteporary zip file if they were uploaded at the same time. When the files are compiled alot of functions that usually works on result files works differently or does not work as the zip file does not really exist or that its more than one file. As mentioned before you can not search for the compiled file since it does not exist. But when searching with this option turned on the compiled file will show up if one or more of the files it contains match the search criteria. This tools is automatically turned on since you are often looking after a specifik upload. MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have this tool and it is marked yellow in illustration x.<br /> ====Handling result files====<br /> When you have selected the result file(s) you want different buttons will be active depending on the file. The buttons are above the column bar and its where you download, view and convert result files. <br /> <br /> "Get file(s)", "Get all files" and "Get log files" will open a dialog to download selected files, all files or that dates log files. Note! This section's text needs to be updated! <br /> <br /> "Save Headers" saves your current view of columns and files and saves it as default. This button has since been replaced by the two binoculars that are described in The Portal User View#The Search Fields Section. We therefore advice you to use the new and improved binoculars as save headers will be removed. <br /> <br /> "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> "View log files" will view log files from the selected file´s date. When viewing log files you can read them by selecting a file and pressing "View file". There is also the option to "Get file(s)", "Save Headers", "Plot route" and "View file" who are all except "View file" described above. "View file" will open the log file in readable format in your current window. You can also filter logfiles like you filter result files by date, name and if they are downloaded or not. <br /> <br /> "View file" will open the file in a readable format in you current window. If the file is compiled by upload date or not readable this button will not be enabled. <br /> <br /> "Convert to text" will convert and download selected MDF file(s) to your computer. When doing this you will get a pop-up with the ability to add a description to your download. This is only availible for MDF files and this button can therefore only be found on assignments with MDF files. <br /> <br /> "Preview data" will give you a data preview window where you can preview the selected file(s) data. To read more about how to use this window and all its functions read [[Preview data]].</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Creating_a_Task&diff=764 Creating a Task 2017-07-17T12:54:56Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>= Creating a Task=</includeonly><br /> You create a new task by pressing the "New Task" button on the bottom of the screen. This will open a window with one tab for each assignment. Here we will go through how to create a task with all nine kinds of assignments. Note that step 3-7 on MCD-Hub is identical on all assignments so it wont be described to avoid this being repetitive.[[File:Illustration5.png|illustration 1: MCD-Hub|400x400px|thumb|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration5.png]]<br /> ===MCD-Hub===<br /> MCD-Hub assignments are used to collect data using the MCD-Hub flight recorder. This assignment tab has seven areas (as shown in illustration 1) with one funktion each that is used accordingly:<br /> <br /> 1. Selecting which MCD-Hub assignment file to use. Press "Bläddra"/"Browse" to bring up the file selection where you select the .hub file to use.<br /> <br /> 2. Choose which formats the MCD-Hub result files should be converted to when result files are uploaded to the portal from a WCU. <br /> <br /> 3. Write a descriptive text for the assignment. (optional)<br /> <br /> 4. Choose if you want to be notified by email if the assignment fails to start. if you hav not filled in an email adress you will get oppurtunity when pressing ok. (optional)<br /> <br /> 5. Assign owner and the period of validity to the assignment. This is filled automatically and is optionally changed.<br /> <br /> 6. This option is under construction, do not use except for special cases<br /> <br /> 7. Start searching and selecting a WCU by pressing add resources at the bottom left of the screen. There you will get a pop up with 2 boxes, the upper one for searching cars and the bottom one for selected cars. In the top one you can search WCU units with ten different parameters by writing a value and pressing search or ENTER. to select a WCU you drag it from the top to the bottom box so that it appears in the bottom one.<br /> <br /> After you press Ok and make the transfer there will be a pop-up telling you "Transfer ok!" if the transfer and checks went well, otherwise there will be a pop-up showing you an error cause.<br /> ===CAN-recorder===<br /> [[File:Illustration6.png|thumb|Illustration 2: Canrecorder|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration6.png]]Canrecorder is a measurement module that allows CAN frames to be captured and logged. This assignment has 4 functions described in illustration 2 and below:<br /> <br /> 1. Turning on or off CAN frame pass through filter. If you choose to have the filter on you must specify which CAN bus or CAN buses you wish to record. If you do not have the filter on you should not specify a CAN bus.<br /> <br /> 2. Choose if you want to record with the high speed CAN bus and/or the low speed can bus.<br /> <br /> 3. Specify which CAN buses you want to record by entering their ID and then pressing enter. This should only be done if the CAN frame passthrough filter is turned on.<br /> <br /> 4. Select how much time to record before and after the trigger.<br /> ===IDC===<br /> Internal Diagnostic Client (IDC) is a measurement module that allows a sequence of diagnostic requests to be sent and responses recorded. The sequence of diagnostic requests are uploaded to the portal as a text file (usually ending with ".seq").<br /> <br /> When assigning an IDC assignment its identical to a MCD-Hub assignment except the file you select must be a .seq file and you can not choose conversion format.<br /> ===SoH===<br /> [[File:Illustration7.png|353x353px|Illustration 3: SoH tab|thumb|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration7.png]]The State of Health (SoH) assignment collects specific status information from vechiles. You select which information you want the assignment to collect by filling in one or more of the six boxes shown in illustration 3. In order for SoH data to be correctly interpreted, relevant description files (SDDB/GDS) for the vehicles executing the SoH assignment must have been defined. To add a SDDB/GDS file to a vehicle, see [[The_Portal_Administrator_View#The_Edit_Car_Dialog]].The six different options are:<br /> *Mileage<br /> *Voltage<br /> *Read ECU software numbers<br /> *Read ECU DTC:s<br /> *Read OBD-II PIDs<br /> *App Diagnotstic Db Part Num<br /> ===Signal Reader===<br /> [[File:Illustration8.png|thumb|Illustration 4: Signal reader assignment.|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration8.png]]Signal Reader is a measurement module that allows monitoring and logging of CAN-bus signals, as well as diagnostics data. Signal Reader performs more or less the same kind of measurements as the MCD-Hub but it has other functions at its disposal. Those other functions are described below and shown in illustration 4:<br /> <br /> 1. You select the file you want. It must be a .haf file which is a text version of .hub a file.<br /> <br /> 2. When you have selected a file and WCU units the buses defined in the file and the WCU will be mapped but if they can not it will come a pop-up. In the pop-up window you will have to map the different buses to eachother manually. You can always map the buses manually by selecting to and then pressing mappings at the top. Read more about this in [[I/O configurations]] and [[Mappings]].<br /> <br /> 3. With a Signal Reader assignment you can follow WCU signals live by selecting monitor signals. When selected it will come up two boxes under the task description. In the left one you search for signals and drag them over to the right one where the monitored signals are. You can later se the monitored signals through the vehicles tab. It is also possible to copy the signals text in the bottom right corner of the right box. Next to the copy text button you can also paste signals as text where the pasted signal names will be matched against the list of unselected signals<br /> <br /> 4. You can choose if you want the signals to have their source modules names as a prefix.<br /> ===SWDL===<br /> A Software Download (SWDL) task updates the ECU software in one or more ECUs in one or more vehicles. A number of Versatile Binary Format (VBF) files containing the ECU software need to be supplied, along with PIN codes to allow security access to re-program the ECUs.<br /> ===ETAS===<br /> Through an ETAS task, an ETAS ES720 Drive Recorder system can be conillustrationd, and measurement data offloaded, and accessed through the WICE Portal.<br /> <br /> When assigning an ETAS assignment its identical to a MCD-Hub assignment except the file you select must be a .exp file and you can not choose conversion format.<br /> ===SoftHub===<br /> The SoftHub is a more recent version of the MCD-Hub measurement system, and a SoftHub task is created much in the same way an MCD-Hub task is.<br /> <br /> When assigning an SoftHub assignment its identical to a MCD-Hub assignment except the file you select must be a .shub file.<br /> ===Blue piraT===<br /> The blue PiraT is a measurement system from Telemotive AG that can be conillustrationd with measurement set-ups, and data accessed through the WICE Portal. Note that to use the blue PiraT module, the WCUs to be used need to be preconillustrationd with a special software package. Contact Alkit Communications in order to set this up.</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Tasks_Tab&diff=763 Tasks Tab 2017-07-17T12:51:22Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div><includeonly>= Tasks Tab=</includeonly><br /> <div class="keywords"> Regexp, regex, reg ex, regual expression </div><br /> [[File:Illustration14.png|thumb|The search panel for finding tasks.]]<br /> In the task tab you can search for tasks, view their assignment, see the log files, see the result files, manage assignments, and much more.<br /> <br /> ==The Search Fields Section==<br /> The search field section consists of different columns where most have a field where you can insert search criteria to find assignments. As an example you have the label “Task ID:” which searches the field for task IDs matching your search criteria. When searching for tasks you can fill in one or more columns where the different search criteria will be treated with a logical AND between eachother.<br /> <br /> In every collumn you can use regular expressions for your searches. To designate an "all" search you enter a period (".") for that particular field or leave it empty if another field is already filled. All searches are treated with the letters as wild-cards. An example is if you intend to search for tasks containing the word “bear” simply enter “bear” in the text field. Now, if there are tasks with the names “bear”, “polar bear”and “unbearable” all of these will match as they contain the word “bear” somewhere.<br /> <br /> To search for a range of WCUs, assume the WCUs MM-810:1 – MM-823:1, you enter the query 81[0-9]|82[0-3]. This is a regular expression where the first expression, 81[0-9], means that we want our search to start with an '8' followed by a '1' and then any digit in range 0-9. The second part, 82[0-3], means an '8' followed by a '2' and then any digit in range 0-3. The two expressions are combined with a pipe characater ("|") which means logical OR. In other words we are looking for range 810-819 OR 820-823.<br /> <br /> '''Note!''' If your WCU/resource group you are searching for has special characters (like '(' or '/') in its name you may need to escape these characters in order to get the desired result. Escape means putting a '\' before the special character. For example if you want to enter (and search for) the resource group name 'ABC(Alpha_Bravo_Charlie)' you need to write 'ABC\(Alpha\_Bravo\_Charlie\)'. Another example is when you want to list a WCU that contains "07-51" in its name. In this case you need to type "07\-51", otherwise the "-" character will make the searcher to search for a range of numbers.<br /> <br /> For more info how to use regular expressions, see [https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression#Standards Regular Expressions]<br /> <br /> When you are filling in search criteria you can see in the top right corner how WICE says "Rows found:". That tell you how many assignments your search will find so you know if you need to narrow or broaden your search.<br /> <br /> In the bottom right corner you have two binoculars. With these you can save and load your search criterias and shown columns for future uses. You can also set a view of criteria and columns as your default by hovering over the view you want and then pressing the pin button. There is also two magnifying glasses that can save and load your search results so even if their information change and can not be found with the same search criteria you can still find them. You can also pair a search with a view by going to your searches and then on the search click the binocular button and select which view you want to pair it with. You can also pair them going to your searches and press "Select search views" where you get a window with the option to pair your searches with views.<br /> <br /> If you are using an older version than 2.45.0 you have 4 bars with calanders to the right of them. This is a function to search assignments by date of creation and last update. This function has been removed in 2.45.0 and does not work like intended in 2.44.8.<br /> <br /> In 2.45.0 and forward there will at the top be a option to search assignments after their label. By selecting multiple labels you can search for more than one at the same time.<br /> <br /> == The Result Section ==<br /> The assignments are fetched when you press the "Search" button in the tasks tab. Here we will go through the bottom part of task tab and the options for your previous search.<br /> ===Assignment Options===<br /> You can right-click one or many assignments to get a window with a range of options described below:<br /> * "Show task description" will show you the description of the task that the assignment you right-clicked on belongs <br /> * "Go to Vehicles Panel" will take you to the vehicles tab. When you are in the vehicles tab the car(s) you selected will be shown in the vehicles tab.<br /> * "Go to Search Panel" will take you to the search tab. When you are in the search tab the WCU(s) you selected will be selected in the search tab.<br /> * "Get/Show assignment" will give you a small pop-up with some assignment information and a "Download assignment" button if a download is possible. If you choose to press "Download assignment" the assignment file will be downloaded to your computer in its original format.<br /> * "Edit task" will give you the option to edit ownership and expiration date of the task. It will also show you the WCU(s) the task is running on. <br /> * "Show car info" and "Show WCU info" will give you a pop-up showing you available info of the assignment car and WCU. Depending on which car/WCU you choose there will be different information available since cars/WCUs can lack information. <br /> * "Show message" will show you the assignment's status message. <br /> * "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> * "Event subscription" is an option where you choose to subscibe to a car, a WCU or an assignment. When hovering above "Event subscription" you will see three options, "Connect", "Assignment status" and "Result upload". With the option "Connect " you can subscribe to the selected car(s) or WCU(s) and get notified when their connection status changes. "Assignment status" and "Result upload" subscribes you to selected assignment(s) and gets you notified about status changes and when results are uploaded. You will se events when clicking on the bell symbol at the top which gets a red dot when theres new events from your subscriptions.<br /> <br /> ===Column Options===<br /> The result section have alot of ways to sort, view and handle the result with the columns. When right-clicking a column you will get a window with different options for the column. <br /> * "Sort Ascending" and "Sort Descending" will sort the assignments in ascending or descending order after the column's attribute.<br /> * "Configure Sort" where you can add more levels of sorting so that it sorts for more than one thing in different priority. For example can you sort after task ID ascending and then sort after WCU ID descending. When a column has a sorting prefrens the option "Clear Sort" will appear which clears your sorting prefrences for that column. <br /> * "Columns" opens a window where you can select which columns you want to have shown and which you want to have hidden by checking their boxes or unchecking them. If you remove a column with a filled search criteria that criteria will still matter when you make a new search. Also when you make the new search the column will reappear.<br /> * "Group by" group together the assignments that share the column's attribute value. When they are grouped there will be the option "Ungroup" that ungroups them. <br /> * "Freeze" moves the column to the left corner and freezes it in position so it can be rearranged. If there is alraedy a frozen column till will move next to it as they go from left to right in chronological order. The "freeze" then becomes "Unfreeze" which revertes the freeze. <br /> * "Export to excel" will export the columns and results into an excel file that will get downloaded. <br /> * "Clear all fields" will clear all columns of their criteria. <br /> * "Get help for this column" should take you here.<br /> <br /> ===Get result files===<br /> When selecting a file you can view the result files by pressing "Get Result Files" if there are available result files. That will create a window where you can search, view and download result files. It is also possible to view result files from multiple assignments at the same time by selecting many assignments of the same type (Only possible for signalreader and MCD-Hub).<br /> ====Searching result files====<br /> The window will look different depending on what kind of assignment you selected watching. The different windows all share alot of tools and have the same concept, to search and filter files. In illustration x you can see how a MCD-Hub result window looks. This is a great example as this window contains all different tools while all the others can be seen as an MCD-Hub window that does not need and therefore lacks some of the tools. There are some tools that all have and just like when creating a task the common ones are at the top. Below is a description of all tools followed by which assignment window that has them:<br /> <br /> ===== General search functions =====<br /> [[File:Get Result files.png|thumb|400x400px|illustration 6: The-MCD-Hub result file window.]]<br /> At the top there are two boxes, labeled "Description" and "Filename", where you can search for files based on their description and filename. The "Description" box is disabled so that you can not type in it. When searching after filename it will search after the not compiled files and not the compiled files. Below those are two other boxes with two checkboxes. The boxes are labeled "From" and "To" and contain dates that can be changed by pressing the calender next to the box. The files are filtered so only files between those two dates are shown. The checkboxes are labeled "Measurement Date" and "Upload to Portal" and only one of them can be checked. The checkboxes tell if the files will be filtered by measurement or upload date. There is also a checkbox labeled "Hide downloaded files" which will filter out already downloaded files but this button is disabled if the checkbox "Compline by portal update date" is checked. These tools are the same for all type of assignments and can be seen as marked green in illustration 6. <br /> <br /> ===== GPX inclusion =====<br /> The checkbox "Include GPX" enables gpx files to be downloaded when downloading result files. That means each downloaded result file will have a corresponding gpx file containing the route of the car when the assignment was executed. Note that the en date for the route is 24 hours after the start since assignments does not always have end dates. ETAS, Softhub, SignalReader and MCD-Hub assignments has this tool and its marked pink in illustration x. <br /> <br /> ===== File type filters =====<br /> There are three areas of checkboxes that are framed by a blue line and a sqaure checkbox labeled "Raw". The areas and the checkbox filter what type of files are shown. The framed areas stand for one filetype with their own subgroups. The areas are labeled with what file type they filter. When the square checkbox in the framed area is checked it will show you that areas file type. When their square checkbox is not checked the other checkboxes are disabled as they are the subgroups for that file type. The "Raw" checkbox is simpler as it only stands for if you want to show raw files and lacks subgroups. As with the other search functions in the WICE portal leaving all filters empty will result in everything being shown. The area labeled "Text" has 3 other checkboxes which will show you "Common", "Separate" and "All" text files. Note that not all text files have the subtype "Common" or "Seprate" and can only be shown in "All". The area labeled "MDF" has two other checkboxes which will you mdf files "With module names" or "Without module names" as a prefix for the signalnames. The area labeled "Vector" has two other checkboxes which will show you files refering to frames by "Frame ID" or "Frame name". MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have these tools but do not that Signalreader does not have the "Raw" button and can show all text files. These tools are marked blue in illustration x. <br /> <br /> ===== Compile by upload date =====<br /> The checkbox "Compile by portal upload date" will compile result files in a conteporary zip file if they were uploaded at the same time. When the files are compiled alot of functions that usually works on result files works differently or does not work as the zip file does not really exist or that its more than one file. As mentioned before you can not search for the compiled file since it does not exist. But when searching with this option turned on the compiled file will show up if one or more of the files it contains match the search criteria. This tools is automatically turned on since you are often looking after a specifik upload. MCD-Hub, Softhub and SignalReader have this tool and it is marked yellow in illustration x.<br /> ====Handling result files====<br /> When you have selected the result file(s) you want different buttons will be active depending on the file. The buttons are above the column bar and its where you download, view and convert result files. <br /> <br /> "Get file(s)", "Get all files" and "Get log files" will open a dialog to download selected files, all files or that dates log files. Note! This section's text needs to be updated! <br /> <br /> "Save Headers" saves your current view of columns and files and saves it as default. This button has since been replaced by the two binoculars that are described in The Portal User View#The Search Fields Section. We therefore advice you to use the new and improved binoculars as save headers will be removed. <br /> <br /> "Plot route" will open a map in your current window. In that map you can see up to 100 of the cars registered positions during the last 24 hours or the last 100 registered positions. For more information about this read [[Plot Route Dialog]]. <br /> <br /> "View log files" will view log files from the selected file´s date. When viewing log files you can read them by selecting a file and pressing "View file". There is also the option to "Get file(s)", "Save Headers", "Plot route" and "View file" who are all except "View file" described above. "View file" will open the log file in readable format in your current window. You can also filter logfiles like you filter result files by date, name and if they are downloaded or not. <br /> <br /> "View file" will open the file in a readable format in you current window. If the file is compiled by upload date or not readable this button will not be enabled. <br /> <br /> "Convert to text" will convert and download selected MDF file(s) to your computer. When doing this you will get a pop-up with the ability to add a description to your download. This is only availible for MDF files and this button can therefore only be found on assignments with MDF files. <br /> <br /> "Preview data" will give you a data preview window where you can preview the selected file(s) data. To read more about how to use this window and all its functions read [[Preview data]].</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=The_Portal_User_View&diff=762 The Portal User View 2017-07-17T12:50:00Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>This section will explain all panels and dialog in depth. Both regarding how you use it but also the limitations and some reasons to why it looks like it does. Section 3.1 will describe the meaning of the top level panels. In section 3.2 through 3.5 each top level panel will be described in detail.<br /> <br /> <br clear="all"><br /> {{:Login}}<br /> <br /> <br clear="all"><br /> {{:Creating a Task}}<br /> <br /> ==Top level tabs==<br /> On the top level there are four different tabs to choose from. From left to right they are:<br /> #'''Tasks''' Manages your tasks, search among tasks and create new tasks.<br /> #'''Search''' In this tab you search and download result files.<br /> #'''Vehicles''' Manages your vehicles. As vehicles belong to users of the system, you need to assign a vehicle to yourself before you initiate tasks running on it. You can also deassign vehicles when you are finished with them.<br /> #'''Administration''' In this tab you can administer your name, email-address, password and a few other things.<br /> <br /> With these three tabs you can do all the work that is needed to start, stop and handle data to and from vehicles. A figure of the tabs is presented in Illustration 5 below.<br /> [[File:Illustration11 v240.png|frame|left|Illustration 5: The four tabs shown to a user.]]<br /> <br /> <br /> <br /> <br clear="all"><br /> {{:Tasks Tab}}<br /> <br clear="all"><br /> {{:Search Tab}}<br /> <br clear=all><br /> <br /> {{:Vehicles}}</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe https://wiki.alkit.se/wice295/index.php?title=Downloading_Files&diff=761 Downloading Files 2017-07-17T11:42:20Z

<p>Carl.ridderstolpe: </p> <hr /> <div>When using functions such as "Get file(s)" to download files they only prepare and zip the files for download. This is because this preperation can take a considerable time and is therefore best prepared in the background. When pressing download or get to downlaod file(s) you will get a toast telling you that your files are being prepared and you will be notified when ready. as shown in the figure below.[[File:Illustration20.png|Toast shown when file preparation begins.|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration20.png|none|thumb|800x800px]]When the preparation is done and your files are ready for download, the following toast will be shown in conjunction with the download icon in the tool strip.[[File:Illustration21.png|Toast shown when file preparation is done.|link=https://wiki.alkit.se/index.php/File:Illustration21.png|none|thumb|350x350px]]To see which file(s) are ready for download you press the blue map with a download sign located at the top of the screen. With the dialog that opened you can see, control and download your downloads. Here there are two bars where you can see the preperation progress and download progress going from gray to green. To easily sort apart the downloads you can see their given description to easily remember which contains what. To download a file or set of files you press the downwards pointing arrow icon where you will get an option to set a filename before pressing download. You can also remove or cancel downloads by pressing the red icon with a cross.</div>

Carl.ridderstolpe